WO2024093721A1 - Communication method, device and system - Google Patents

Communication method, device and system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024093721A1
WO2024093721A1 PCT/CN2023/126150 CN2023126150W WO2024093721A1 WO 2024093721 A1 WO2024093721 A1 WO 2024093721A1 CN 2023126150 W CN2023126150 W CN 2023126150W WO 2024093721 A1 WO2024093721 A1 WO 2024093721A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
message
cell
terminal device
rrc reconfiguration
information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/126150
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
李娇娇
李秉肇
强鹂
毛颖超
大卫•勒孔特
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2024093721A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024093721A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • H04W36/0061Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link of neighbour cell information
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • H04W36/0058Transmission of hand-off measurement information, e.g. measurement reports
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/08Reselecting an access point
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W74/00Wireless channel access
    • H04W74/08Non-scheduled access, e.g. ALOHA

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a communication method, device, and system.
  • a user equipment In a wireless communication system, when a user equipment (UE) is in a service connection state and maintains service, it moves from one cell to another. In order to ensure the continuity of UE communication, switching is required.
  • UE user equipment
  • the fifth-generation (5G) radio access network (RAN) architecture considers the use of independent deployment of centralized units (CU) and distributed units (DU) in base stations to better meet the needs of various scenarios and applications.
  • the 5G system considers the use of layer 1 and/or layer 2 (L1/L2) triggered switching.
  • layer 1 includes the physical (physical layer, PHY) layer
  • layer 2 includes the radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer, the media access control (media access control, MAC) layer, and the packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer.
  • the terminal device needs to first obtain the pre-configuration information of the candidate cell through the Radio Resource Control (RRC) reconfiguration message to facilitate the terminal device to access the candidate cell.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the present application provides a communication method, apparatus and system, which can provide better configuration information when a terminal device performs cell switching, thereby improving communication efficiency.
  • a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a terminal device, or can also be executed by a component (such as a chip or circuit) of the terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
  • a component such as a chip or circuit
  • the following description is taken as an example of execution by a terminal device.
  • the method may include: receiving a first message, the first message carrying first information, the first information including configuration information of M candidate cells, M being a positive integer greater than 1; sending a second message, the second message carrying M second information, the M second information corresponding to the configuration information of the M candidate cells; accessing a first cell, the first cell belonging to the M candidate cells.
  • the terminal device determines the information that needs to be reported to the candidate cell based on the configuration information of the candidate cell, and includes the reported information in the second message sent to the network device, which is used for the candidate cell to better configure the terminal device in the future, ensuring that the terminal device can be provided with better configuration information after accessing the candidate cell, thereby improving communication efficiency.
  • the first message is a radio resource control RRC reconfiguration message
  • the second message is an RRC reconfiguration completion message
  • the second information includes one or more of the following information:
  • Conditional primary and secondary cells PSCell add or change related parameters
  • the network device can better configure the terminal after receiving the above information. resources or measurements of equipment to improve communication efficiency.
  • the second message includes RRC reconfiguration completion messages of M candidate cells, and the RRC reconfiguration completion messages of the M candidate cells carry the M second information.
  • the RRC reconfiguration completion messages of the M candidate cells do not include an RRC processing identifier.
  • the problem of the terminal device being unable to set the RRC processing identifier value is avoided, and the problem of the network device being unable to determine the corresponding RRC process or the corresponding erroneous RRC processing process after receiving the RRC processing identifier is also avoided.
  • first indication information is received, where the first indication information indicates access to the first cell.
  • a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a network device, or can also be executed by a component (such as a chip or circuit) of the network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • a component such as a chip or circuit
  • the following is an example of execution by a network device.
  • the method may include: sending a first message, the first message carrying first information, the first information including configuration information of M candidate cells, M being a positive integer greater than 1; receiving a second message, the second message carrying M second information, the M second information corresponding to the configuration information of the M candidate cells.
  • the terminal device determines the information that needs to be reported to the candidate cell based on the configuration information of the candidate cell, and includes the reported information in the second message sent to the network device, which is used for the candidate cell to better configure the terminal device in the future, ensuring that the terminal device can be provided with better configuration information after accessing the candidate cell, thereby improving communication efficiency.
  • the first message is an RRC reconfiguration message
  • the second message is an RRC reconfiguration completion message
  • the second information includes one or more of the following information:
  • Conditional primary and secondary cells PSCell add or change related parameters
  • the second message includes an RRC reconfiguration completion message of M candidate cells, and the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells carries the M second information.
  • the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells does not include an RRC processing identifier.
  • a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a terminal device, or can also be executed by a component (such as a chip or circuit) of the terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
  • a component such as a chip or circuit
  • the method may include: receiving a third message, the third message including third information, the third information including configuration information of N candidate cells and N configuration identifiers, the N configuration identifiers are used to identify the configuration information of the N candidate cells, N is a positive integer; receiving second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate access to a second cell, the second cell belongs to the N candidate cells; sending a fourth message, the fourth message including a first identifier; wherein the first identifier is used to indicate the configuration information of the second cell.
  • the configuration identifier is associated with the configuration information of the candidate cell, so that the candidate cell after switching can obtain the candidate cell or candidate cell configuration corresponding to the RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • it solves the problem that the candidate cell cannot obtain the RRC reconfiguration completion message due to the absence of the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • it also associates the information sent by the terminal device with the target cell configuration, ensuring that the candidate cell can correctly configure the terminal device after the terminal device is switched to ensure normal communication.
  • the first identifier can have more values, This avoids the problem of limited network configuration caused by occupying a large number of RRC processing identifiers.
  • the third message is an RRC reconfiguration message
  • the fourth message is an RRC reconfiguration completion message
  • a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a network device, or can also be executed by a component (such as a chip or circuit) of the network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • a component such as a chip or circuit
  • the following is an example of execution by a network device.
  • the method may include: sending a third message, the third message including third information, the third information including configuration information of N candidate cells, N is a positive integer; sending second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device accesses a second cell, the second cell belongs to the N candidate cells; receiving a fourth message, the fourth message including a first identifier; wherein the first identifier is used to indicate the configuration information of the second cell.
  • the configuration identifier is associated with the configuration information of the candidate cell, so that the candidate cell after switching can obtain the candidate cell or candidate cell configuration corresponding to the RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • it solves the problem that the candidate cell cannot obtain the RRC reconfiguration completion message due to the lack of RRC reconfiguration message.
  • it also associates the information sent by the terminal device with the target cell configuration, ensuring that the candidate cell can correctly configure the terminal device after the terminal device is switched to ensure normal communication.
  • the first identifier can have more values, avoiding the problem of limited network configuration caused by occupying more RRC processing identifiers.
  • the third message is an RRC reconfiguration message
  • the fourth message is an RRC reconfiguration completion message
  • a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a terminal device, or can also be executed by a component (such as a chip or circuit) of the terminal device, and this application does not limit this.
  • a component such as a chip or circuit
  • the method may include: receiving a fifth message, the fifth message including configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer; if the third cell is accessed for the first time after receiving the fifth message, sending a first RRC reconfiguration completion message, the first RRC reconfiguration completion message including configuration information corresponding to the third cell, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
  • third indication information is received, where the third indication information indicates access to the third cell.
  • a second RRC reconfiguration completion message is sent, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes the RRC processing identifier; or, if it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the RRC reconfiguration completion message is not sent.
  • a second RRC reconfiguration completion message is sent, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter.
  • a second RRC reconfiguration complete message is sent, and the second RRC reconfiguration complete message does not include the first parameter; alternatively, if the first parameter does not change, the RRC reconfiguration complete message is not sent.
  • the first parameter is whether to need to measure at least one of a gap indication parameter and an uplink DC parameter.
  • this method can reduce repeated reporting of some parameters, reduce signaling overhead, and save transmission resources.
  • a communication method which may include: a first network device sends a fifth message to a terminal device, and the fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer; if the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message to the first network device, and the first RRC reconfiguration completion message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
  • the first network device in the method may be a network device, or may be a component of a network device (such as a chip or circuit).
  • the terminal device in the method may be a terminal device or a component of a terminal device (such as a chip or circuit).
  • the terminal device evaluates that the execution conditions of the third cell are met, and accesses the third cell.
  • the first network device sends the third indication information to the terminal device, and the third indication information instructs the terminal device to access the third cell.
  • the terminal device if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the first network device, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes an RRC processing identifier; or, if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the terminal device if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the first network device, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter.
  • the terminal device if the first parameter does not change, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the first network device, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter; or, if the first parameter does not change, the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the first parameter is whether to need to measure at least one of a gap indication parameter and an uplink DC parameter.
  • this method can reduce repeated reporting of some parameters, reduce signaling overhead, and save transmission resources.
  • the first network device sends fourth indication information to the terminal device, and the fourth indication information indicates that the terminal device does not carry the first parameter in the first RRC reconfiguration completion message or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • a communication method may include: a first network device sends a fifth message to a terminal device, the fifth message including configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer; if the terminal device accesses a third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message to a second network device, the first RRC reconfiguration completion message including configuration information corresponding to the third cell, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells; the second network device is the network device to which the third cell belongs.
  • the first network device or the second network device in the method may be a network device, or may be a component of a network device (such as a chip or circuit).
  • the terminal device in the method may be a terminal device or a component of a terminal device (such as a chip or circuit).
  • the terminal device evaluates that the execution conditions of the third cell are met, and accesses the third cell.
  • the first network device sends the third indication information to the terminal device, and the third indication information instructs the terminal device to access the third cell.
  • the terminal device if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the second network device, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes the RRC processing identifier; or, if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the terminal device if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the second network device, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter.
  • the terminal device if the first parameter does not change, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the second network device, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter; or, if the first parameter does not change, the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the first parameter is whether to need to measure at least one of a gap indication parameter and an uplink DC parameter.
  • this method can reduce repeated reporting of some parameters, reduce signaling overhead, and save transmission resources.
  • the first network device sends fourth indication information to the terminal device, and the fourth indication information indicates that the terminal device does not carry the first parameter in the first RRC reconfiguration completion message or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a terminal device, or can also be executed by a component (such as a chip or circuit) of the terminal device, and this application does not limit this.
  • a component such as a chip or circuit
  • the method may include: receiving a fifth message, the fifth message including configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer; if it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, sending a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
  • a second RRC reconfiguration completion message is sent, and the first parameter is not included in the second RRC reconfiguration completion message; or, if it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message and the first parameter has not changed, no RRC reconfiguration completion message is sent.
  • the first parameter is whether to need to measure at least one of a gap indication parameter and an uplink DC parameter.
  • this method can reduce repeated reporting of some parameters, reduce signaling overhead, and save transmission resources.
  • fourth indication information is received, and the fourth indication information indicates that the first parameter is not carried in the second RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • third indication information is received, where the third indication information indicates access to the third cell.
  • a communication method may include: a first network device sends a fifth message to a terminal device, the fifth message including configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer; if the terminal device does not access the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the first network device, the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
  • the first network device in the method may be a network device, or may be a component of a network device (such as a chip or circuit).
  • the terminal device in the method may be a terminal device or a component of a terminal device (such as a chip or circuit).
  • the terminal device if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the first parameter has not changed, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the first network device, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter; or, if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the first parameter has not changed, the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the first parameter is whether to need to measure at least one of a gap indication parameter and an uplink DC parameter.
  • this method can reduce repeated reporting of some parameters, reduce signaling overhead, and save transmission resources.
  • the first network device sends fourth indication information to the terminal device, and the fourth indication information indicates that the terminal device does not carry the first parameter in the second RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the terminal device evaluates that the execution conditions of the third cell are met, and accesses the third cell.
  • the first network device sends the third indication information to the terminal device, and the third indication information instructs the terminal device to access the third cell.
  • a communication method may include: a first network device sends a fifth message to a terminal device, the fifth message including configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer; if the terminal device does not access the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the second network device, the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
  • the first network device or the second network device in the method may be a network device, or may be a component of a network device (such as a chip or circuit).
  • the terminal device in the method may be a terminal device or a component of a terminal device (such as a chip or circuit).
  • the terminal device if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the first parameter has not changed, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the second network device, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter; or, if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the first parameter has not changed, the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the first parameter is whether to need to measure at least one of a gap indication parameter and an uplink DC parameter.
  • this method can reduce repeated reporting of some parameters, reduce signaling overhead, and save transmission resources.
  • the first network device sends fourth indication information to the terminal device, and the fourth indication information indicates that the terminal device does not carry the first parameter in the second RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the terminal device evaluates that the execution conditions of the third cell are met, and accesses the third cell.
  • the first network device sends the third indication information to the terminal device, and the third indication information instructs the terminal device to access the third cell.
  • the present application also provides a communication device, which can implement any of the communication methods described in aspects 1 to 7.
  • the device can be a terminal device or a network device, or other device capable of implementing the above communication method, which can implement the above method through software, hardware, or hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the device may include a processor and a memory.
  • the processor is configured to support the device to perform the corresponding functions of the method described in any one of the above aspects.
  • the memory is used to couple with the processor, and stores the necessary program instructions and data of the device.
  • the device may also include a communication interface for supporting communication between the device and other devices.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver or a transceiver circuit.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, which includes the communication device described in the above aspects.
  • Another aspect of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, wherein the computer-readable storage medium stores instructions, and when the computer-readable storage medium is run on a computer, the computer executes the methods described in the above aspects.
  • Another aspect of the present application provides a computer program product comprising instructions, which, when executed on a computer, enables the computer to execute the methods described in the above aspects.
  • the present application also provides a chip system, which includes a processor and may also include a memory, for implementing the method described in any of the above aspects.
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of a network device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG3 is a schematic diagram of CU-DU separation of a network device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a dual connection scenario provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a switching interaction provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG6 is a schematic diagram of an interaction of L1/L2 triggered mobility between DUs within a CU provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an interaction of intra-CU and intra-DU L1/L2 triggered mobility provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG8 is a schematic diagram of a CPA interaction provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of an interaction of CPC provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of an interaction of continuous L1/L2 triggered mobility provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG11 is a schematic diagram of a continuous CPC scenario provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG12 is a schematic diagram of a continuous CPC interaction provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is an interactive schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of another interaction of L1/L2 triggered mobility provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is an interactive schematic diagram of another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of another interaction of L1/L2 triggered mobility provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is an interactive schematic diagram of yet another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG18 is an interactive schematic diagram of another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG19 is a schematic diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG20 is a schematic diagram of another communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG21 is a schematic diagram of another communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 22 is a schematic diagram of a communication system provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile communication
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD LTE time division duplex
  • UMTS universal mobile telecommunication system
  • WiMAX worldwide interoperability for microwave access
  • 5G mobile communication system can be a non-standalone (NSA) or an independent network (SA).
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • MTC machine type communication
  • LTE-M long term evolution-machine
  • D2D device-to-device
  • M2M machine-to-machine
  • IoT network can include Internet of Vehicles, for example.
  • the communication mode in the Internet of Vehicles system Collectively referred to as vehicle to other devices (vehicle to X, V2X, X can represent anything), for example, the V2X may include: vehicle to vehicle (vehicle to vehicle, V2V) communication, vehicle to infrastructure (vehicle to infrastructure, V2I) communication, vehicle to pedestrian (vehicle to pedestrian, V2P) or vehicle to network (vehicle to network, V2N) communication, etc.
  • vehicle to vehicle vehicle to vehicle, V2V
  • V2I vehicle to infrastructure
  • V2P vehicle to pedestrian
  • V2N vehicle to network
  • the technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to future communication systems, such as the sixth generation (6G) mobile communication system. This application does not limit this.
  • 6G sixth generation
  • the terminal device may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device.
  • the terminal can be widely used in various scenarios, for example, device-to-device (D2D), vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication, machine-type communication (MTC), Internet of Things (IOT), virtual reality, augmented reality, industrial control, automatic driving, telemedicine, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, etc.
  • D2D device-to-device
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • MTC machine-type communication
  • IOT Internet of Things
  • virtual reality augmented reality
  • industrial control automatic driving
  • telemedicine smart grid
  • smart furniture smart office
  • smart wear smart transportation
  • smart city etc.
  • the terminal may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a computer with wireless transceiver function, a wearable device, a vehicle, a drone, a helicopter, an airplane, a ship, a robot, a mechanical arm, a smart home device, etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the terminal.
  • a terminal device can be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to users, such as a handheld device with wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, etc.
  • some examples of terminals can be: mobile phones, tablet computers, computers with wireless transceiver functions (such as laptops, PDAs, etc.), mobile Internet devices (mobile internet devices, MIDs), virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) devices, augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) devices, wireless terminals in industrial control (industrial control), wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, etc.
  • Wireless terminals in smart cities wireless terminals in smart homes (for example, home appliances such as televisions, smart boxes, game consoles), cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (PDAs), handheld devices with wireless communication functions, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, vehicle-mounted devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in 5G networks, or terminal devices in future evolved public land mobile networks (PLMNs), etc.
  • home appliances such as televisions, smart boxes, game consoles
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDAs personal digital assistants
  • handheld devices with wireless communication functions computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems
  • vehicle-mounted devices wearable devices
  • terminal devices in 5G networks or terminal devices in future evolved public land mobile networks (PLMNs)
  • PLMNs public land mobile networks
  • wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices, which are a general term for the intelligent design and development of wearable devices for daily wear using wearable technology, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes.
  • Wearable devices are portable devices that are worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories.
  • Wearable devices are not only hardware devices, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, and independent of smartphones to achieve complete or partial functions, such as smart watches or smart glasses, as well as those that only focus on a certain type of application function and need to be used in conjunction with other devices such as smartphones, such as various smart bracelets and smart jewelry for vital sign monitoring.
  • the terminal device can also be a terminal device in the Internet of Things (IoT) system.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • Its main technical feature is to connect objects to the network through communication technology, thereby realizing an intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and object-to-object interconnection.
  • IoT technology can achieve massive connections, deep coverage, and terminal power saving through narrowband (NB) technology, for example.
  • NB narrowband
  • the terminal device may also be a vehicle or a complete vehicle, which can achieve communication through the Internet of Vehicles, or it may be a component located in the vehicle (for example, placed in the vehicle or installed in the vehicle), that is, a vehicle-mounted terminal device, a vehicle-mounted module or a vehicle-mounted unit (on-board unit, OBU).
  • a vehicle-mounted terminal device for example, placed in the vehicle or installed in the vehicle
  • OBU on-board unit
  • terminal devices can also include sensors such as smart printers, train detectors, and gas stations. Their main functions include collecting data (part of the terminal equipment), receiving control information and downlink data from network devices, and sending electromagnetic waves to transmit uplink data to network devices.
  • sensors such as smart printers, train detectors, and gas stations.
  • Their main functions include collecting data (part of the terminal equipment), receiving control information and downlink data from network devices, and sending electromagnetic waves to transmit uplink data to network devices.
  • the network device can be any device with wireless transceiver function.
  • the device includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (e.g., home evolved Node B, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi), etc.
  • eNB evolved Node B
  • RNC radio network controller
  • NB Node B
  • BSC base station controller
  • BTS base transceiver station
  • home base station e.g., home evolved Node B, or home Node B, HNB
  • BBU baseband unit
  • Wi-Fi wireless fidelity
  • the access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP) or transmission and reception point (TRP) in the system can also be a gNB in a 5G, such as NR, system, or a transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group of (including multiple antenna panels) antenna panels of a base station in a 5G system, or a network node constituting a gNB or a transmission point, such as a baseband unit (BBU), or a distributed unit (DU), or a base station in a next generation communication 6G system, etc.
  • a 5G such as NR, system
  • TRP or TP transmission point
  • TRP or TP transmission point
  • a network node constituting a gNB or a transmission point such as a baseband unit (BBU), or a distributed unit (DU), or a base station in a next generation communication 6G system, etc.
  • BBU baseband unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • the network equipment provides services for the cell, and the terminal equipment communicates with the cell through the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) allocated by the network equipment.
  • the cell can belong to a macro base station (for example, macro eNB or macro gNB, etc.), or to a base station corresponding to a small cell.
  • the small cell here may include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell, femto cell, etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmission power, and are suitable for providing high-speed data transmission services.
  • the network architecture may include a terminal device 101, a network device 102, and a core network device 103.
  • the terminal device 101 can be connected to the network device 102 in a wireless manner, and can be connected to the core network device 103 through the network device 102.
  • the terminal device 101 can be fixed or movable.
  • network devices, terminal devices, and core network devices included in the network architecture shown in Figure 1 are merely examples, and the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this.
  • more or fewer terminal devices that communicate with network devices may also be included, for example, more or fewer core network devices that communicate with network devices may also be included.
  • core network devices For the sake of simplicity, they are not described one by one in the accompanying drawings.
  • network devices, terminal devices, and core network devices are shown, the application scenario may not be limited to network devices, terminal devices, and core network devices.
  • devices for carrying virtualized network functions may also be included.
  • the network device may also be referred to as an access network device, and the access network device may include a base station gNB.
  • the access network device may be connected to the core network device through the NG interface, and the access network devices may be connected through the Xn-C interface.
  • the gNB may adopt a CU-DU separation structure, and the CU and DU may be connected through the F1 interface.
  • the CU includes a radio resource control (RRC) layer and a PDCP layer
  • the DU includes an RLC layer, a medium access control (MAC) layer and a physical layer (PHY).
  • the core network device may include an access and mobility management function (AMF) network element and a user plane function (UPF) network element.
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • UPF user plane function
  • gNB can also include active antenna unit (AAU).
  • AAU active antenna unit
  • CU implements some functions of gNB, and DU implements some functions of gNB.
  • CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services.
  • DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services.
  • AAU implements some physical layer processing functions, RF processing and related functions of active antennas. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or be converted from the information of the PHY layer, therefore, under this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by the DU, or by the DU and the CU.
  • the network device can be a device including one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node.
  • the CU can be divided into a network device in the access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into a network device in the core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
  • FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a dual-connectivity (DC) scenario applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Dual-connectivity or multi-connectivity means that a terminal device can communicate with two network devices at the same time, and one of the two network devices can be an NR network device and the other can be an LTE network device, or both can be NR network devices.
  • One network device is a master node (MN), and one network device is a secondary node (SN).
  • MN master node
  • SN secondary node
  • each network device can include a cell group (CG).
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • the cell group under the MN is a master cell group (MCG), and the cell group under the SN is a secondary cell group (SCG).
  • the primary cell group may include one primary cell (PCell) and at least one secondary cell (SCell), and the secondary cell group may include one primary secondary cell (PSCell) and at least one secondary cell (SCell).
  • FIG4 is illustrated by taking the example that each cell group includes 2 SCells.
  • the terminal device will have the process of adding or changing the PSCell.
  • the addition of PSCell triggered by the terminal device is called conditional PSCell addition (CPA), and the change of PSCell triggered by the terminal device is called conditional PSCell change (CPC).
  • CPA can be understood as the conditional addition of PSCell.
  • CPC can be understood as the conditional change of PSCell.
  • CPA and CPC can also be collectively referred to as conditional PSCell addition and change (CPAC).
  • the network configuration will configure multiple candidate PSCells and send the CPAC configuration to the terminal device.
  • the CPAC configuration includes the configuration of the multiple candidate PSCells and the corresponding execution conditions (execution condition).
  • execution condition execution condition
  • the terminal device evaluates that the execution condition of a candidate PSCell is met, the terminal device can perform the process of adding or changing the PSCell.
  • the cell that meets the execution condition can be called a selected cell.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device completes the CPA or CPC process and establishes a connection with a candidate PSCell that meets the conditions (for example, a random access channel (RACH)), the terminal device will release the CPA configuration and/or CPC configuration. Therefore, before the network is reconfigured or the network is restarted, the terminal device cannot continue to use the CPA configuration and/or CPC configuration. In order to reduce the delay and signaling overhead of the secondary cell group change, the terminal device may not release the CPA configuration and/or CPC configuration. Before the network is reconfigured or the network is restarted, the terminal device continues to use the previously stored CPA configuration or CPC configuration, thereby continuing to execute the CPA or CPC process.
  • RACH random access channel
  • CPA or CPC may be collectively referred to as CPAC in this application.
  • CPA configuration or CPC configuration may be collectively referred to as CPAC configuration.
  • the network device may configure or deploy or control at least one cell.
  • the cell accessed by the terminal device before the handover is called the source cell
  • the cell accessed by the terminal device after the handover is called the target cell.
  • the source cell and the target cell may be cells configured by the same network device, or they may be cells configured by different network devices.
  • the network device is a base station.
  • the source cell is cell 11 configured by base station 1
  • the target cell is cell 12 configured by base station 1.
  • the source cell is cell 11 configured by base station 1
  • the target cell is cell 21 configured by base station 2.
  • the network device includes a CU and a DU.
  • the source cell is cell 11 configured by DU1
  • the target cell is cell 12 configured by DU1.
  • the source cell is cell 11 configured by DU1
  • the target cell is cell 21 configured by DU2.
  • DU1 and DU2 may belong to the same CU or different CUs.
  • the terminal may perform a change in the PSCell.
  • the primary cell under the primary base station may remain unchanged.
  • the source cell is cell 11 configured by secondary base station 1
  • the target cell is cell 12 configured by secondary base station 1.
  • the source cell is cell 11 configured by secondary base station 1
  • the target cell is cell 21 configured by secondary base station 2.
  • the candidate cell is also referred to as a switching candidate cell or a target candidate cell or a candidate target cell, and the names are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the network device can configure at least one candidate cell for the terminal device.
  • the target cell is a candidate cell among the at least one candidate cell.
  • the network device that the terminal device communicates with before switching is called the source network device, and the network device that the terminal device communicates with after switching is called the target network device.
  • the source network device and the target network device can be the same or different.
  • the network device is a base station
  • the source network device and the target network device are both base station 1
  • the source cell is cell 11 configured by base station 1
  • the target cell is cell 12 configured by base station 1.
  • the handover is a handover within the base station.
  • the network device includes CU and DU.
  • the source network device and the target network device are both DU1, the source cell is cell 11 configured by DU1, and the target cell is cell 12 configured by DU1.
  • the handover is a handover within DU.
  • the network device is an auxiliary base station
  • the source network device and the target network device are both auxiliary base station 1
  • the source cell is cell 11 configured by auxiliary base station 1
  • the target cell is cell 12 configured by auxiliary base station 1.
  • the handover is a handover within the auxiliary base station.
  • the network device is a base station
  • the source cell is cell 11 configured by base station 1
  • the source network device is base station 1
  • the target cell is cell 21 configured by base station 2
  • the target network device is base station 2.
  • the handover is an inter-base station handover.
  • the network device includes a CU and a DU.
  • the source cell is cell 11 configured by DU1, the source network device is DU1, the target cell is cell 21 configured by DU2, and the target network device is DU2.
  • the handover is an inter-DU handover.
  • DU1 and DU2 may belong to the same CU or different CUs.
  • the network device is a secondary base station
  • the source cell is cell 11 configured by secondary base station 1
  • the source network device is secondary base station 1
  • the target cell is cell 21 configured by secondary base station 2
  • the target network device is secondary base station 2.
  • the handover is an inter-secondary base station handover.
  • the network device communicates with at least one candidate network device to negotiate at least one candidate cell configured for the terminal device.
  • the target network device is one of the at least one candidate network device.
  • the terminal device when a terminal device moves from one cell to another, or due to network reasons, business load adjustment, equipment failure, etc., the terminal device may leave the source cell and access the target cell to ensure the terminal The continuity of communication between the device and the network. The above process is called "handoff".
  • the switching can be controlled by layer 3, namely, the RRC layer.
  • layer 3 namely, the RRC layer.
  • FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a switching interaction provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG5 , the switching process can be as follows:
  • the source base station performs measurement configuration on the terminal device, and the terminal device performs measurement according to the measurement configuration and reports the measurement report;
  • the source base station makes a handover decision.
  • the source base station can refer to the measurement results reported by the terminal device and/or its own handover algorithm to make a handover decision. For example, when the signal quality of the source cell is poor, but the signal quality of the target cell is good, the source base station determines to perform a handover;
  • the source base station sends a handover request message to the target base station.
  • the request message transmits the necessary information for handover preparation, which at least includes the target cell ID, key, terminal ID in the source cell, basic access layer configuration, etc.
  • the target base station performs admission control
  • the target base station sends a handover request confirmation message to the source base station. If the target base station confirms that the terminal device can access, it replies with a handover request confirmation message to the source cell, where the handover command sent to the terminal device can be included in the confirmation message in the form of an RRC container;
  • the source base station sends an RRC reconfiguration message (or handover command) to the terminal device.
  • the message contains the information required to access the target cell, including at least the target cell identifier, the new terminal device identifier, the target cell security algorithm identifier, and may also carry the dedicated RACH resources for accessing the target cell;
  • the terminal device After receiving the handover command, the terminal device performs synchronization with the target cell, for example, through a random access procedure (RACH);
  • RACH random access procedure
  • the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the target base station, which is used to confirm the successful completion of the RRC reconfiguration.
  • the RRC reconfiguration complete message includes the information required by the target base station to configure the terminal device after the terminal device accesses, which can help the target base station better configure the resources or measurements of the terminal device.
  • the main contents included in the RRC reconfiguration complete message may be shown in Table 1.
  • the information elements or fields in Table 1 are the information elements or fields currently included in the RRC reconfiguration complete message, and new fields may be introduced in the future, which is not limited in this application.
  • the RRC processing identifier must be carried, and other information elements or fields except the RRC processing identifier are optional.
  • the bit size of some parameters in the RRC reconfiguration complete message is very large. It can be understood that the bit size values in the above table are for example only and are not necessarily accurate values.
  • switching can be accomplished by L1/L2 triggered mobility.
  • L1/L2 triggered mobility may also be referred to as L1/L2 switching, L1/L2 mobility, lower layer switching, lower layer mobility or L2 triggered mobility, etc., and the names are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • L1/L2 triggered mobility is to instruct the terminal to perform switching through L1 signaling or L2 signaling.
  • L1 signaling can be downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI), and L2 signaling can be MAC control element (Media Access Control control element, MAC CE).
  • DCI downlink control information
  • L2 signaling can be MAC control element (Media Access Control control element, MAC CE).
  • the main idea of L1/L2 triggered mobility is that the network device selects one or more candidate cell configurations based on the measurement report reported by the terminal device, where the measurement report can be a layer 3 (L3) measurement report, and provides the terminal device with the configuration information of one or more candidate cells through pre-configuration information (which can be included in the RRC reconfiguration message). After receiving the configuration information of L1/L2 triggered mobility, the terminal device does not immediately perform the handover.
  • the source network device determines to trigger L1/L2 triggered mobility based on the measurement report (such as L1 measurement report) reported by the terminal device.
  • the source network device sends an L1/L2 triggered mobility cell change (cell switch) command to the terminal device through L1/L2 signaling, which indicates the target cell identity or target cell configuration of the terminal device switching, and optionally includes the target beam information of the target cell.
  • the L1/L2 triggered mobility cell change command can also be called an L1/L2 switching command, or an L1/L2 triggered mobility command, or an L1/L2 triggered mobility MAC CE/DCI.
  • the terminal device performs the handover process based on the instructions in the cell change command.
  • L1/L2 triggered mobility can be limited to the same CU. There are many technical solutions for implementing L1/L2 triggered mobility, and several of them are listed below as examples:
  • Solution 1 L1/L2 triggered mobility between DUs within a CU (intra-CU inter-DU).
  • Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of an interaction of L1/L2 triggered mobility between DUs in a CU provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the process of L1/L2 triggered mobility between DUs in a CU includes:
  • the terminal device performs measurement according to the measurement configuration and reports a measurement report;
  • the measurement configuration and report may be an L3 measurement configuration and report, and may be configured by the CU;
  • the base station determines the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration decision (or handover preparation decision).
  • the base station determines to perform L1/L2 triggered mobility and determines the candidate cells for L1/L2 triggered mobility.
  • the base station determines the configuration decision or candidate cells by referring to the reporting results of the terminal device and/or its own handover algorithm;
  • the CU sends a terminal device context establishment request message to multiple candidate DUs.
  • the multiple candidate DUs may be DUs to which multiple candidate cells belong;
  • the candidate DU sends a terminal device context establishment request confirmation message to the CU. If the candidate DU confirms that the terminal device can be connected, it replies to the CU with a terminal device context establishment request confirmation message, which may include the configuration information of the candidate cell;
  • the base station (e.g., CU) sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the terminal device, which includes L1/L2 triggered mobility preconfiguration information, and the L1/L2 triggered mobility preconfiguration information includes configuration information of one or more candidate cells.
  • the RRC reconfiguration message may also include configuration information of the source cell.
  • the configuration information of each candidate cell may be sent in one of the following ways:
  • the configuration information of each candidate cell is included in an RRC reconfiguration message. That is, the RRC reconfiguration message sent by the base station to the terminal device in step 4 includes one or more RRC reconfiguration messages, each of which includes the configuration information of one or more candidate cells;
  • the configuration information of each candidate cell is contained in an information element (IE). That is, the RRC reconfiguration message sent by the base station to the terminal device in the fourth step contains one or more IEs, each containing the configuration information of one or more candidate cells.
  • the IE can be a cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig) IE.
  • the terminal device After receiving the RRC reconfiguration message, the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration completion message to the base station.
  • the RRC reconfiguration completion message is used to confirm the RRC reconfiguration process sent by the base station in step 4;
  • the terminal device performs L1 measurement based on the L1 measurement configuration and sends an L1 measurement report.
  • the L1 measurement configuration may be included in the RRC reconfiguration message in step 4.
  • the base station determines to trigger L1/L2 triggered mobility based on the L1 measurement report sent by the terminal device;
  • the base station sends an L1/L2 triggered mobility cell change command to the terminal device.
  • the cell change command can be carried on MAC CE or DCI.
  • the cell change command indicates the target cell identifier of the terminal device switching, or indicates the target cell configuration identifier of the terminal device switching.
  • the target cell is included in the above-mentioned candidate cells.
  • the terminal device accesses the target cell.
  • the terminal device may perform synchronization with the base station (e.g., target DU) to which the target cell belongs.
  • the synchronization process may be implemented through the RACH process, or through other processes (e.g., RACH-less);
  • the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the base station.
  • Solution 2 L1/L2 triggered mobility within CU and DU (intra-CU intra-DU).
  • Figure 7 is a schematic diagram of an interaction of intra-CU intra-DU L1/L2 triggered mobility provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the process of intra-CU intra-DU L1/L2 triggered mobility includes:
  • the terminal device performs measurement according to the measurement configuration and reports a measurement report;
  • the measurement configuration and report may be an L3 measurement configuration and report, and may be configured by the CU;
  • the base station determines the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration decision (or handover preparation decision).
  • the base station determines to perform L1/L2 triggered mobility and determines the candidate cells for L1/L2 triggered mobility.
  • the base station determines the configuration decision or candidate cells by referring to the reporting results of the terminal device and/or its own handover algorithm;
  • the CU sends a terminal device context establishment request message to multiple candidate DUs.
  • the multiple candidate DUs may be DUs to which multiple candidate cells belong;
  • the candidate DU sends a terminal device context establishment request confirmation message to the CU. If the candidate DU confirms that the terminal device can If the cell is connected, the CU is replied with a terminal device context establishment request confirmation message, which may include the configuration information of the candidate cell;
  • the base station (e.g., CU) sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the terminal device, which includes L1/L2 triggered mobility preconfiguration information.
  • the L1/L2 triggered mobility preconfiguration information includes configuration information of one or more candidate cells.
  • the RRC reconfiguration message may also include configuration information of the source cell.
  • the configuration information of each candidate cell may be sent in one of the following ways:
  • the configuration information of each candidate cell is included in an RRC reconfiguration message. That is, the RRC reconfiguration message sent by the base station to the terminal device in step 4 includes one or more RRC reconfiguration messages, each of which includes the configuration information of one or more candidate cells;
  • the configuration information of each candidate cell is included in an IE. That is, the RRC reconfiguration message sent by the base station to the terminal device in the fourth step includes one or more IEs, each including the configuration information of one or more candidate cells.
  • the IE may be a cell group configuration IE.
  • the terminal device After receiving the RRC reconfiguration message, the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration completion message to the base station.
  • the RRC reconfiguration completion message is used to confirm the RRC reconfiguration process sent by the base station in step 4;
  • the terminal device performs L1 measurement based on the L1 measurement configuration and sends an L1 measurement report.
  • the L1 measurement configuration may be included in the RRC reconfiguration message in step 4.
  • the base station determines to trigger L1/L2 triggered mobility based on the L1 measurement report sent by the terminal device;
  • the base station sends an L1/L2 triggered mobility cell change command to the terminal device.
  • the cell change command can be carried on MAC CE or DCI.
  • the cell change command indicates the target cell identifier of the terminal device switching, or indicates the target cell configuration identifier of the terminal device switching.
  • the target cell is included in the above-mentioned candidate cells;
  • the terminal device accesses the target cell.
  • the terminal device may perform synchronization to the base station (e.g., DU).
  • the synchronization process may be implemented through the RACH process, or through other processes (e.g., RACH-less);
  • the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the base station.
  • CPAC refers to the CPA and/or CPC process.
  • CPA and CPC are the addition and change of PSCell in DC scenario respectively.
  • the main idea is that the network equipment (such as the main base station) configures multiple candidate PSCell cells, and each candidate PSCell cell configuration includes the configuration of the cell and the associated execution conditions. When the execution conditions associated with a candidate cell are met, the terminal device can perform the addition or change of the PSCell to the candidate cell.
  • the CPA process is to perform the PSCell addition process when the PSCell addition conditions are met. Taking the MR-DC scenario, as shown in Figure 8, the CPA triggered by the MN is as follows:
  • the MN sends a request to add a secondary station to the SN where the candidate cell is located;
  • the SN where the candidate cell is located sends a secondary station addition request confirmation to the MN;
  • the MN sends the CPA configuration to the terminal device via the RRC reconfiguration message, which includes the configuration information of the candidate cells from each SN and the related execution conditions;
  • the terminal device After receiving the RRC reconfiguration message from the MN, the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the MN.
  • the terminal device uses other RRC configurations in the RRC reconfiguration message except the CPA;
  • the terminal device starts to evaluate the execution conditions. If the execution conditions of a candidate cell are met, the terminal device uses the configuration of the candidate cell selected in the RRC reconfiguration message (ie, the candidate cell that meets the execution conditions) and sends an RRC reconfiguration completion message (including an SN reconfiguration completion message) to the MN;
  • the terminal device accesses the target cell (the candidate cell selected above/the candidate cell that meets the execution conditions), for example, performs a RACH process;
  • the CPC process is to execute the PSCell change process when the PSCell change conditions are met. Take the CPC process triggered by the MN in the MR-DC scenario as an example, as shown in Figure 9:
  • the MN sends a request to add a secondary station to the SN where the candidate cell is located;
  • the SN where the candidate cell is located sends a secondary station addition request confirmation to the MN;
  • the MN sends CPC configuration to the terminal device via RRC reconfiguration message, which includes configuration information of candidate cells from each SN and related execution conditions;
  • the terminal device After receiving the RRC reconfiguration message from the MN, the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the MN.
  • the terminal device uses other RRC configurations in the RRC reconfiguration message except the CPC;
  • 4a.MN informs SN that CPC has been triggered through Xn-U address indication
  • the terminal device starts to evaluate the execution conditions. If the execution conditions of a candidate cell are met, the terminal device uses the configuration of the candidate cell selected in the RRC reconfiguration message (that is, the candidate cell that meets the execution conditions) and sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message (including an SN reconfiguration complete message) to the MN;
  • 6.MN informs the source SN to stop data transmission with the terminal device
  • the terminal device accesses the target cell (the candidate cell selected above/the candidate cell that meets the execution conditions), for example, performs a RACH process;
  • the source SN sends an SN state transfer to the target SN via the MN;
  • the MN forwards data to the target SN.
  • consecutive (or subsequent) L1/L2 triggered mobility is that after executing L1/L2 triggered mobility once, the terminal device does not release the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration information, but continues to maintain the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration information.
  • the base station (such as the service DU of the terminal device) can determine the L1/L2 triggered mobility cell change command based on the measurement report reported by the terminal device, and the terminal device uses the maintained L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration information to execute subsequent L1/L2 triggered mobility based on the target cell indicated by the cell change command. That is, L1/L2 triggered mobility can be executed multiple times in succession.
  • Continuous L1/L2 triggered mobility can also be called subsequent L1/L2 triggered mobility, etc.
  • subsequent L1/L2 triggered mobility etc.
  • Step 0 to Step 10 The same as the process in FIG. 6 , the first L1/L2 triggered mobility process is performed for the terminal device.
  • the target DU can indicate the handover completion to the CU.
  • the ACCESS SUCCESS message can indicate the identifier of the target cell to which the terminal device is switching;
  • the terminal device continues to perform L1 measurement and reports the L1 measurement result, and the measurement result is reported to the base station. For example, the terminal device reports the measurement result to the target DU after the terminal device performs the first L1/L2 triggered mobility. At this time, the target DU becomes the DU connected to the terminal device at this time;
  • the DU where the terminal device is located determines the triggering of L1/L2 triggered mobility based on the measurement report reported by the terminal device, and determines the target cell for this handover;
  • the DU where the terminal device is located sends an L1/L2 triggered mobility cell change command to the terminal device, which includes the terminal
  • the target cell identifier or target cell configuration identifier of the handover of the terminal device is also included in the previously configured candidate cells.
  • the target cell of this handover is the previous source cell, or another candidate cell belonging to the same DU as the previous source cell;
  • the terminal device accesses the target cell of this handover.
  • the terminal device can perform synchronization to the target DU of this handover.
  • the synchronization process can be implemented through the RACH process, or through other processes (such as RACH-less);
  • the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the target cell.
  • the above steps 11 to 16 can be repeated multiple times.
  • the terminal device can release the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration based on the instruction of the network device, or release the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration by itself, for example, the number of handovers reaches a threshold, or the duration of receiving the configuration reaches a threshold.
  • CPAC In CPAC, after completing the RACH process with the target cell, the terminal device releases the CPA/CPC configuration. Therefore, the terminal device cannot use the CPAC configuration before the network is reconfigured or restarted.
  • subsequent CPAC or the selective activation of cell groups process allows CPAC to continue after SCG switching and before network reconfiguration.
  • the terminal device communicates with the MN and cell 3 under the SN (there may be other SCells), that is, cell 3 is the PSCell cell of the terminal device at this time;
  • the network configures the CPC configuration for the terminal device, where the candidate cells include cells ⁇ 1, 2, ..., 9 ⁇ .
  • the CPC configuration may also include the configuration and execution conditions of each candidate cell;
  • the terminal device detects that the execution condition of cell 5 is met, the terminal device changes the PSCell cell to cell 5. After completing the connection with cell 5, the terminal device does not release the CPC configuration, but continues to maintain the CPC configuration and execute the CPC process.
  • the terminal device can continue to evaluate other candidate cells. When other candidate cells meet the execution conditions, the terminal device should trigger the PSCell change process. For example, in Figure 11, the terminal device subsequently detects that cell 3 meets the execution conditions, so the terminal device switches the PSCell cell to cell 3.
  • Step 1 to Step 8 The same as the process shown in FIG9 , which is the process of executing CPC for the first time;
  • the terminal device evaluates a candidate cell that meets the execution conditions, the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration completion message to the MN, which may indicate the target candidate cell selected by the terminal device;
  • the MN forwards the SN reconfiguration message to the SN to which the candidate cell belongs;
  • the terminal device performs synchronization with the selected candidate cell.
  • the above steps 9 to 12 can be repeated multiple times.
  • the terminal device can release the CPAC configuration based on the instruction of the network device, or release the CPAC configuration by itself, for example, when the number of switching executions reaches a threshold, or the time length of receiving the configuration reaches a threshold.
  • step 4 e.g., FIG. 6 or FIG. 7
  • the configuration of each candidate cell in the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration information sent by the base station (e.g., CU) to the terminal device is not sent via an RRC reconfiguration message
  • the terminal device cannot respond to the RRC reconfiguration completion message to the candidate cell.
  • step 10 the terminal device will not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message to the target cell, resulting in The candidate cell is unable to obtain information in the RRC reconfiguration completion message, such as resources or measurement parameters of the terminal device, which may cause the terminal device to be improperly configured or unable to perform normal data transmission after accessing the candidate cell.
  • the candidate cell cannot obtain the uplink DC parameters in Table 1, the candidate cell cannot avoid the uplink zero frequency point when providing configuration for the terminal device. If the terminal device sends data at this frequency point, data loss may occur.
  • the candidate cell cannot obtain the indication of whether a measurement gap is required in Table 1, the candidate cell cannot determine whether to configure a measurement gap for the terminal device when providing configuration for the terminal device, which affects the scheduling of the terminal device and thus affects data transmission. If other function information elements are subsequently introduced in the RRC reconfiguration completion message, the candidate cell will not be able to obtain this information, resulting in other impacts.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a switching method, which is used for the candidate cell in the switching scenario to better obtain the information in the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent by the terminal device, so as to facilitate the normal configuration and data transmission of the terminal device after accessing the candidate cell.
  • FIG13 is a schematic diagram of an example of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method can be performed by a terminal device and a network device, or can also be performed by a chip in a terminal device and a chip in a network device.
  • FIG13 shows the steps or operations of the communication method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application can also perform other operations or variations of the operations in FIG13, or reasonable exchanges between steps.
  • the terminal device receives the first message.
  • the first message carries first information or indicates first information, and the first information includes configuration information of M candidate cells, where M is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the network device sends a first message.
  • the network device may be a base station or a CU.
  • the first message is an RRC reconfiguration message, such as the RRC reconfiguration message in step 4 of FIG. 6 , FIG. 7 , or FIG. 10 .
  • the first information includes configuration information of M candidate cells, and the configuration information of the M candidate cells is respectively included in M RRC reconfiguration messages, and the M RRC reconfiguration messages are included in the first message. That is, the configuration information of each candidate cell is included in one RRC reconfiguration message, and the first information includes the M RRC reconfiguration messages.
  • the first information includes configuration information of M candidate cells, and the configuration information of the M candidate cells is respectively included in M IEs (e.g., CellGroupConfig IE), and the M IEs are included in the first message. That is, the configuration information of each candidate cell is included in one IE, and the first information includes the M IEs.
  • M IEs e.g., CellGroupConfig IE
  • the terminal device sends a second message.
  • the second message carries M second information, and the M second information corresponds to the configuration information of the M candidate cells.
  • the network device receives the second message.
  • the second message sent by the terminal device to the network device includes three second information, and the three second information correspond to the configuration information of the three candidate cells one by one.
  • the first second information corresponds to candidate cell 1
  • the second second information corresponds to candidate cell 2
  • the third second information corresponds to candidate cell 3.
  • the second message is an RRC reconfiguration complete message, such as the RRC reconfiguration complete message in step 5 of FIG. 6 , FIG. 7 , or FIG. 10 .
  • the second information corresponds to the configuration information of the candidate cell, which can be understood as the terminal device setting the content or value of the second information according to the configuration information of the candidate cell after receiving the configuration information of the candidate cell.
  • the M second information corresponds to the configuration information of each of the M candidate cells, which can be understood as the terminal device setting the content or value of each second information according to the configuration information of each candidate cell, thereby determining the content of the M second information and including it in the second message.
  • the second information corresponding to the configuration information of the candidate cell can also be understood as the second information corresponding to the candidate cell.
  • the second information includes one or more of the following information:
  • Uplink DC parameters such as uplinkTxDirectCurrentList or uplinkTxDirectCurrentTwoCarrierList or uplinkTxDirectCurrentMoreCarrierList;
  • Conditional primary and secondary cells PSCell add or change related parameters, such as selectedCondRRCReconfig in Table 1;
  • Measurement report available indication such as ue-MeasurementsAvailable in Table 1;
  • the measurement gap requirement indication such as needForGapsConfigNR or needForGapNCSG-InfoNR or needForGapNCSG-InfoEUTRA in Table 1.
  • the measurement gap may also be understood as a measurement interval.
  • the second information is the information included in the RRC reconfiguration complete message.
  • the terminal device determines whether to include the uplink DC parameters in the second information corresponding to the candidate cell according to the report uplink DC indication included in the candidate cell configuration (e.g., reportUplinkTxDirectCurrent or reportUplinkTxDirectCurrentTwoCarrier or reportUplinkTxDirectCurrentMoreCarrier). For another example, the terminal device determines whether to include the measurement report available indication in the second information corresponding to the candidate cell according to whether it has recorded available measurements and the recorded measurement report configuration (e.g., VarLogMeasReport) in the candidate cell configuration.
  • the report uplink DC indication included in the candidate cell configuration e.g., reportUplinkTxDirectCurrent or reportUplinkTxDirectCurrentTwoCarrier or reportUplinkTxDirectCurrentMoreCarrier.
  • the terminal device determines whether to include the measurement report available indication in the second information corresponding to the candidate cell according to whether it has recorded available measurements and the recorded measurement report configuration (e.g., VarLogMe
  • the terminal device determines whether to include the measurement gap requirement indication in the second information corresponding to the candidate cell according to the required gap configuration (e.g., needForGapsConfigNR or needForGapNCSG-ConfigNR or needForGapNCSG-ConfigEUTRA, etc.) in the candidate cell configuration.
  • the required gap configuration e.g., needForGapsConfigNR or needForGapNCSG-ConfigNR or needForGapNCSG-ConfigEUTRA, etc.
  • the M second information are respectively included in M IEs, and each IE includes one or more of the above information, that is, each IE includes the second information of each candidate cell.
  • the second message includes RRC reconfiguration complete messages of M candidate cells, and the RRC reconfiguration complete messages of the M candidate cells carry M second information. That is, the second information of each candidate cell is included in one RRC reconfiguration complete message, and the M reconfiguration complete messages are included in the second message.
  • the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells does not include the RRC processing identifier, i.e., the rrc-TransactionIdentifier in Table 1.
  • the configuration information of the M candidate cells included in the first information sent by the terminal device to the network device is included in M IEs (e.g., CellGroupConfig IE), rather than in M RRC reconfiguration messages.
  • the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells is not used to respond to the M RRC reconfiguration messages, so there is no need to include the RRC processing identifier to identify the RRC reconfiguration process.
  • the problem of the terminal device being unable to set the value of the RRC processing identifier is avoided, and the problem of the network device being unable to determine the corresponding RRC process or the corresponding erroneous RRC processing process after receiving the RRC processing identifier is also avoided.
  • the second information is associated with or includes indication information
  • the indication information is used to indicate the candidate cell or the configuration information of the candidate cell corresponding to the second information.
  • the second information sent by the terminal device to the network device can be associated with the configuration information of the candidate cell sent by the network device to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device includes the second information of M candidate cells in the second message and sends it to the network device, and sends the information in the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells to the candidate cells, thereby solving the problem that the candidate cells cannot obtain the information in the RRC reconfiguration completion message, and avoiding the problem that the candidate cells cannot correctly configure the terminal device and the terminal device cannot transmit data normally.
  • the terminal device accesses the first cell.
  • the first cell belongs to M candidate cells.
  • the network device to which the first cell belongs when the terminal device accesses the first cell, the network device to which the first cell belongs performs an access process with the terminal device. See step 9 in Figure 6 or Figure 7 or step 9 and step 15 in Figure 10.
  • the network device to which the first cell belongs is the network device that sends the first message.
  • the terminal device before accessing the first cell, receives first indication information.
  • the first indication information indicates that the terminal device accesses the first cell.
  • the network device sends the first indication information.
  • the first indication information can be carried in L1/L2 signaling, such as carried in MAC CE or DCI.
  • the first indication information is carried in the L1/L2 triggered mobility cell change command, see step 8 in Figure 6 or Figure 7 or steps 8 and 14 in Figure 10.
  • the target cell for indicating the cell change in the first indication information is the first cell.
  • the terminal device After receiving the first indication information, performs an access process to the first cell according to the content of the first indication information, such as through a RACH process or other processes (such as RACH-less).
  • the terminal device may perform L1 measurement and send a measurement report to the network device, see step 6 in FIG. 6 or FIG. 7 or steps 6 and 12 in FIG. 10 .
  • the network device sends second information corresponding to the first cell to the DU to which the first cell belongs, for example, sending part of the information in the second information.
  • the network device can be understood as a CU, or the network device includes the DU to which the first cell belongs, for example, the network device is a base station. It can be understood that the network device can submit corresponding second information to the DUs to which the M candidate cells belong when receiving the second information of the M candidate cells.
  • the second information includes parameters required for DU configuration or required to be used by the DU, so the DU needs to obtain the second information before or when the terminal device accesses.
  • L1/L2 triggered mobility between DUs within a CU as an example.
  • Other scenarios of L1/L2 triggered mobility may refer to this embodiment and will not be described in detail.
  • the terminal device receives an RRC reconfiguration message from a base station (e.g., CU), and the reconfiguration complete message includes L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration information of one or more candidate cells.
  • the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration information of each candidate cell can be included in an IE (e.g., CellGroupConfig) or in an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • step 5 of FIG. 14 the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message, wherein the reconfiguration complete message includes one of the following:
  • the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent by the terminal device to the network device in step 5 includes a list of RRC reconfiguration completion messages of the candidate cells.
  • the RRC reconfiguration completion message corresponding to each candidate cell does not include an RRC processing identifier.
  • the RRC reconfiguration completion message corresponding to each candidate cell is associated with indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate the candidate cell or the configuration of the candidate cell corresponding to the RRC reconfiguration completion message, for example, the indication information is a candidate cell configuration identifier.
  • the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent by the terminal device to the network device in step 5 contains an information list related to each candidate cell.
  • the information list related to each candidate cell includes one or more of the uplink DC parameters, CPAC related parameters, whether the measurement report is available, whether the gap measurement is required, and other information. That is, the information originally contained in the RRC reconfiguration completion message (for example, the RRC reconfiguration completion message in step 10 of Figure 14).
  • the information list corresponding to each candidate cell is associated with indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate the candidate cell or the configuration of the candidate cell corresponding to the information list, for example, the indication information is a candidate cell configuration identifier.
  • the base station After receiving the relevant information of each candidate cell, the base station (such as CU) stores the information.
  • the CU can deliver the received relevant information of each candidate cell to the corresponding DU.
  • the CU uses the information of the candidate cell or sends relevant information to the DU to which the candidate cell belongs for use by the DU.
  • the terminal device In the subsequent L1/L2 triggered mobility process, the terminal device no longer sends an RRC reconfiguration completion message to the base station.
  • the terminal device responds to the RRC reconfiguration message containing the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration information.
  • the RRC reconfiguration completion message includes information about multiple candidate cells.
  • the terminal device determines the information about multiple candidate cells based on the configuration information of the candidate cells, and includes the information about the multiple candidate cells in the second message sent to the network device, which is used for the candidate cells to better configure the terminal device in the future, ensuring that the terminal device can be provided with better configuration information after accessing the candidate cell, thereby improving communication efficiency.
  • the information about the multiple candidate cells includes the information originally included in the RRC reconfiguration completion message for multiple candidate cells.
  • the terminal device solves the problem that the candidate cell cannot obtain the RRC reconfiguration completion message by providing the CU with relevant information about each candidate cell in advance, ensuring that the candidate cell can correctly configure the terminal device after the terminal device is switched, and ensuring normal communication. It also avoids the transmission of RRC messages during the L1/L2 triggered mobility process, avoids the delay of inter-layer interaction and RRC processing, and reduces the delay and interruption time of the L1/L2 triggered mobility process. In the scenario of continuous switching, the terminal device feeds back the required information of the candidate cell in the RRC reconfiguration completion message in reply to the RRC reconfiguration message that triggers the L1/L2 mobility configuration information. In this way, the terminal device does not need to send repeated information when accessing the same candidate cell subsequently, reducing redundant information transmission and saving air interface resources.
  • FIG15 is a schematic diagram of an example of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method can be performed by a terminal device and a network device, or can also be performed by a chip in a terminal device and a chip in a network device.
  • FIG15 shows the steps or operations of the communication method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application can also perform other operations or variations of the operations in FIG15, or reasonable exchanges between steps.
  • the terminal device receives the third message.
  • the third message includes the third information or the third message indicates the third information
  • the third information includes configuration information of N candidate cells and N configuration identifiers
  • the N configuration identifiers are used to identify the configuration information of the N candidate cells
  • N is a positive integer.
  • the configuration information of the candidate cells is associated with the configuration identifier
  • the configuration information of the N candidate cells is associated with the N configuration identifiers respectively.
  • the configuration identifier can be a positive integer that increases sequentially starting from 1, for example, the configuration identifier can be 1, 2, 3, and so on.
  • the network device sends a third message.
  • N configuration identifiers are used to identify the configuration information of N candidate cells, and it can be understood that the configuration information of each candidate cell is associated with a configuration identifier.
  • the third message sent by the network device to the terminal device includes the configuration information of 2 candidate cells and 2 configuration identifiers, the configuration identifier of candidate cell 1 is 1, and the configuration identifier of candidate cell 2 is 2.
  • the configuration identifier here is different from the RRC processing identifier.
  • the third message is an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the configuration information of N candidate cells and N configuration identifiers are included in N IEs. That is, the configuration information of each candidate cell and the associated configuration identifier are included in one IE, and the configuration information of N candidate cells and the associated N configuration identifiers are included in the third message.
  • the terminal device receives the second indication information.
  • the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to access a second cell, which belongs to N candidate cells.
  • the network device sends second indication information.
  • the second indication information is carried in L1/L2 signaling, such as in MAC CE or DCI.
  • the second indication information is carried in an L1/L2 triggered mobility cell change command, see step 8 in FIG. 6 or FIG. 7 or step 8 and step 14 in FIG. 10.
  • the target cell for indicating the cell change in the second indication information is the second cell.
  • the terminal device After receiving the second indication information, the terminal device performs an access process to the second cell according to the content of the second indication information, such as through a RACH process or other processes (such as RACH-less).
  • the terminal device may perform L1 measurement and send a measurement report to the network device, see step 6 in FIG. 6 or FIG. 7 or steps 6 and 12 in FIG. 10 .
  • the terminal device sends a fourth message.
  • the fourth message includes a first identifier, and the first identifier is used to indicate the configuration information of the second cell.
  • the first identifier may be a configuration identifier associated with the configuration information of the second cell. That is, the first identifier is used to indicate the configuration identifier associated with the second cell or the target cell.
  • the first identifier is related to the order of the configuration information of the candidate cells in the third information. It can be understood that the first identifier in the fourth message is used to indicate the order of the configuration information of the second cell. That is, the first identifier indicates the order of the configuration information of the second cell in all the candidate cell configuration information. For example, if the configuration information of the second cell is the second in the order of all the candidate cell configuration information, then the first identifier can be indicated as 2.
  • the third information does not include the configuration identifier at this time.
  • the network device receives the fourth message.
  • the network device here may be different from the network device that sends the second indication information.
  • the network device that sends the second indication information may be a base station to which the source DU or source cell belongs
  • the network device that receives the fourth message may be a base station or CU to which the target DU or target cell belongs.
  • the network device receiving the fourth message and the network device sending the second indication information may be the same network device.
  • the source cell and the target cell of the terminal device belong to the same CU, and the network device to which the source cell belongs may be the same network device as the network device to which the target cell belongs.
  • the fourth message is an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the RRC reconfiguration complete message does not include the RRC processing identifier. Since the configuration of the candidate cell is included in the IE and sent to the terminal device, that is, the candidate cell does not submit an RRC reconfiguration message to the terminal device, if the candidate cell receives an RRC reconfiguration complete message with an RRC processing identifier, the corresponding RRC reconfiguration process cannot be determined, resulting in network configuration confusion. Therefore, the RRC reconfiguration complete message may not carry the RRC processing identifier.
  • L1/L2 triggered mobility between DUs within a CU as an example.
  • Other scenarios of L1/L2 triggered mobility may refer to this embodiment and will not be described in detail.
  • the terminal device receives an RRC reconfiguration message from a base station (e.g., CU), which includes L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration information of one or more candidate cells.
  • the triggered mobility configuration information for each candidate cell can be included in an IE (e.g., CellGroupConfig) and is associated with a configuration identifier for identifying the configuration.
  • IE e.g., CellGroupConfig
  • step 5 of FIG. 16 the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration completion message to the CU or the base station;
  • Steps 6 to 9 are the same as FIG. 6 or FIG. 7 or FIG. 10, and are the first execution of the L1/L2 triggered mobility process;
  • the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the base station, wherein the message includes a configuration identifier associated with the candidate cell (or target cell) after the handover.
  • the RRC reconfiguration complete message does not include an RRC processing identifier
  • Steps 11 to 15 are the same as FIG. 10 , and are the second execution of the L1/L2 triggered mobility process;
  • the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration completion message to the base station, wherein the message includes a configuration identifier associated with the candidate cell after the switch.
  • the RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include an RRC processing identifier
  • the CU may associate the content in the message with the candidate cell after the handover.
  • the CU determines the configuration information to be used subsequently based on the received configuration identifier or the first identifier.
  • the above scheme associates the RRC reconfiguration completion message with the IE containing the candidate cell preconfiguration.
  • the candidate cell after switching can obtain the candidate cell or candidate cell configuration corresponding to the RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • it solves the problem that the candidate cell cannot obtain the RRC reconfiguration completion message due to the absence of the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • it also associates the information sent by the terminal device with the target cell configuration, ensuring that the candidate cell can correctly configure the terminal device after the terminal device is switched, ensuring normal communication.
  • the first identifier can have more values, thus avoiding the problem of limited network configuration caused by occupying more RRC processing identifiers.
  • the terminal device accesses the same candidate cell multiple times, the content of the RRC reconfiguration completion message that the terminal device replies to the candidate cell is the same. For example, if this is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the target cell, the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent by the terminal device to the target cell in step 10 of Figure 6 is the same as the content sent when it first accesses the target cell. In this way, the terminal device sends the same content multiple times, which adds additional signaling overhead.
  • the goal of L1/L2 triggered mobility is to reduce switching delay and terminal time. Sending RRC messages multiple times during the L1/L2 triggered mobility process will increase the delay of inter-layer interaction and RRC processing delay, which conflicts with the purpose of L1/L2 triggered mobility to reduce delay.
  • the terminal device accesses the same candidate PSCell multiple times, the content of the SN reconfiguration completion message that the terminal device replies to the candidate cell is the same.
  • the terminal device if the terminal device is not accessing the candidate cell under the target SN for the first time, the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the target SN contained in the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent by the terminal device to the MN is the same as the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the target SN sent when accessing the candidate cell under the target SN for the first time. In this way, the terminal device sends the same content multiple times, which increases additional signaling overhead.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a switching method for sending RRC messages during the switching process when entering a candidate cell for a non-first time in a switching scenario, thereby avoiding the problem of signaling overhead caused by information redundancy and reducing the consumption of air interface resources.
  • FIG17 is a schematic diagram of an example of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method can be performed by a terminal device and a network device, or can also be performed by a chip in a terminal device and a chip in a network device.
  • FIG17 shows the steps or operations of the communication method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application can also perform other operations or variations of the operations in FIG17, or reasonable exchanges between steps.
  • the terminal device receives the fifth message.
  • the fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer.
  • the first network device sends a fifth message to the terminal device.
  • the fifth message may be an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the L candidate cells may be candidate cells for L1/L2 triggered mobility, or the L candidate cells may be candidate PSCells for CPAC.
  • the terminal device accesses the third cell.
  • the third cell belongs to L candidate cells.
  • the network device to which the third cell belongs performs an access process with the terminal device. See step 9 in FIG. 6 or FIG. 7 , or step 6 in FIG. 8 , or step 8 in FIG. 9 , or step 9 and step 15 in FIG. 10 , or step 8 and step 12 in FIG. 12 .
  • the network device to which the third cell belongs may be the first network device.
  • the terminal device may initiate access to the first network device.
  • the terminal device accesses the third cell, it is evaluated that the execution condition of the third cell is satisfied, and the terminal device accesses the third cell.
  • the execution condition of evaluating the third cell here is satisfied, and reference can be made to the execution condition in the CPAC process.
  • the execution condition in step 5 of Figure 9 of the CPC process the execution condition in step 5 of Figure 9 of the CPC process.
  • the L candidate cells received by the terminal device are the L candidate PSCells of CPAC.
  • the terminal device evaluates the execution condition associated with the candidate cell.
  • the terminal device before the terminal device accesses the third cell, it receives third indication information, and the third indication information indicates that the terminal device accesses the third cell. Accordingly, the first network device sends the third indication information.
  • the third indication information is carried in L1/L2 signaling, such as carried in MAC CE or DCI.
  • the third indication information is carried in L1/L2 triggering In the mobility cell change command, please refer to step 8 in Figure 6 or Figure 7 or step 8 and step 14 in Figure 10.
  • the target cell for indicating the cell change in the third indication information is the third cell.
  • the terminal device After receiving the third indication information, the terminal device performs an access process to the third cell according to the content of the third indication information, such as through a RACH process or other processes (such as RACH-less). In this way, the L candidate cells received by the terminal device are L candidate cells for L1/L2 triggered mobility.
  • the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the first RRC reconfiguration complete message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell.
  • the first RRC reconfiguration complete message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell, which can be understood as the terminal device setting the content or value in the first RRC reconfiguration complete message according to the configuration information of the third cell.
  • the first network device receives a first RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the first network device is a network device to which the third cell belongs, and in this case the terminal device can directly send the first RRC reconfiguration completion message to the network device to which the third cell belongs.
  • the first network device is a base station or a CU or a MN.
  • the first network device is not the network device to which the third cell belongs.
  • the first network device after receiving the first RRC reconfiguration completion message, the first network device also needs to send the first RRC reconfiguration completion message to the network device to which the third cell belongs.
  • the first network device is an MN
  • the network device to which the third cell belongs is a candidate SN.
  • the execution order of S1720 and S1730 may be to execute S1730 first and then S1720, or to execute S1720 first and then S1730, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device determines whether it is accessing the third cell for the first time. In particular, if the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time, the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message. Accordingly, the first network device receives the first RRC reconfiguration completion message. If it is not the first time for the terminal device to access the third cell, the terminal device does not send the first RRC reconfiguration completion message, or the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message. Accordingly, the first network device receives the second RRC reconfiguration completion message. That is, before executing step S1730, the terminal device needs to determine whether it is accessing the third cell for the first time or is about to access the third cell for the first time. The terminal device performs different actions according to different determined results.
  • the terminal device needs to send a first RRC reconfiguration completion message when accessing a candidate cell for the first time:
  • the network device configures the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration, or instructs to update the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration
  • whether the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time can be understood as whether the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message. For example, if the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message. Correspondingly, the first network device or the network device to which the third cell belongs receives the first RRC reconfiguration completion message. If the terminal device does not access the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device does not send the first RRC reconfiguration completion message, or the terminal device sends the second RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the fifth message may include the configuration information of the updated candidate cell.
  • the terminal device after the terminal device obtains the candidate cell configuration or the updated candidate cell configuration, for the same candidate cell configuration, if it is not the first time to access a candidate cell, the terminal device does not need to send repeated RRC reconfiguration completion message information, but does not send or sends a simplified RRC reconfiguration completion message, so as to save signaling overhead and air interface resources.
  • whether the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time can be understood as whether the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time during the operation of the first timer. For example, if the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time during the operation of the first timer, the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message. Correspondingly, the first network device or the network device to which the third cell belongs receives the first RRC reconfiguration completion message. If the terminal device is not during the operation of the first timer, When accessing the third cell for the first time, the terminal device does not send the first RRC reconfiguration completion message, or the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message. Optionally, the terminal device starts the first timer when receiving the fifth message.
  • the terminal device stops or restarts the first timer after completing the switch.
  • the duration of the first timer can be network-configured or predefined.
  • the first timer is used to control the maintenance/preservation of the RRC reconfiguration completion information.
  • the terminal device if it is not the first time to access a candidate cell, the terminal device does not need to send repeated RRC reconfiguration completion message information, but does not send or sends a simplified RRC reconfiguration completion message, so as to save signaling overhead and air interface resources.
  • the terminal device if the timer times out, the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message each time it accesses a candidate cell.
  • the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes the RRC processing identifier, or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes the configuration identifier (refer to the configuration identifier in Figure 15), or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes the RRC processing identifier and the configuration identifier, or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message is an empty message.
  • the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include an SN reconfiguration completion message (for example, the scg-Response in Table 1), or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message includes an empty SN reconfiguration completion message, or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message includes an SN reconfiguration completion message that only includes an RRC processing identifier and/or a configuration identifier.
  • an SN reconfiguration completion message for example, the scg-Response in Table 1
  • the second RRC reconfiguration completion message includes an empty SN reconfiguration completion message
  • the second RRC reconfiguration completion message includes an SN reconfiguration completion message that only includes an RRC processing identifier and/or a configuration identifier.
  • the second RRC reconfiguration complete message does not include the first parameter.
  • the first parameter is one or more parameters in Table 1.
  • the first parameter is whether a measurement gap (gap) indication parameter and/or an uplink DC parameter is required.
  • the second RRC reconfiguration complete message sent by the terminal device to the first network device does not include the first parameter.
  • the RRC reconfiguration complete message sent by the terminal device includes the first parameter.
  • the terminal device does not need to report the parameter again when it accesses the cell again, making the terminal device more flexible in sending the RRC reconfiguration complete message and saving signaling overhead.
  • some parameters in the RRC reconfiguration complete message occupy more bits. If they are sent repeatedly, the signaling overhead consumed is large. This method is used for the first parameter in the RRC reconfiguration complete message, which reduces the repeated reporting of some parameters, reduces the signaling overhead, and saves transmission resources.
  • the terminal device must resend the first parameter. For example, if the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time after the fifth message is updated, the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent by the terminal device includes the first parameter. That is, if the configuration of the candidate cell is updated, the terminal device must also carry the first parameter in the RRC reconfiguration completion message after accessing the candidate cell for the first time.
  • the parameter information carried in the RRC reconfiguration complete message or the parameters that may not be repeatedly sent may be configured or predefined by the network device.
  • the network device may instruct the terminal device to always report the first parameter, or may not include the first parameter, in the case where the terminal device is not accessing the third cell for the first time.
  • the network device may indicate in the configuration information of each candidate cell which parameters the terminal device carries in the RRC reconfiguration completion message. For example, in a case where the terminal device is not accessing the third cell for the first time, whether the uplink DC parameter is carried in the second RRC reconfiguration completion message. For another example, in a case where the terminal device is not accessing the third cell for the first time, whether the second RRC reconfiguration completion message carries a parameter indicating whether a measurement gap is required. For another example, the terminal device receives fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information indicates to the terminal device that the RRC reconfiguration completion message does not carry the first parameter when the terminal device is not accessing the third cell for the first time. Accordingly, the first network device sends the fourth indication information.
  • the missing parameter in the RRC reconfiguration complete message may also be predefined.
  • the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message when switching to a candidate cell for a non-first time, but does not include the first parameter, such as the uplink DC information parameter.
  • the network device instructs the terminal device not to report the first parameter when it is not the first time to switch to a candidate cell; or the network device instructs the terminal device to report the first parameter when it is not the first time to switch to a candidate cell.
  • the terminal device receives the fifth indication information, and the fifth indication information indicates that after the terminal device receives the fifth message, when it does not access the third cell for the first time, the first parameter is not carried in the RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the RRC reconfiguration completion message here can be the first RRC reconfiguration completion message or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message. Accordingly, the first network device sends the fifth indication information.
  • the terminal device needs to resend the first parameter.
  • the change in the first parameter can be understood as the first parameter of the terminal device has changed from the first parameter reported last time.
  • the change in the first parameter can be understood as the first parameter to be reported by the terminal device has changed compared with the first parameter reported last time. For example, after the first parameter changes, the first parameter must be included in the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent by the terminal device to the first network device.
  • the terminal device even if the terminal device is not accessing the third cell for the first time, once the first parameter is sent and changes, the terminal device must include the first parameter in the second RRC reconfiguration completion message reported, or the terminal device reports the first RRC reconfiguration completion message, or the terminal device includes the first parameter in the first RRC reconfiguration completion message reported.
  • the change in the first parameter here may be triggered by a change in the configuration of the network device, or it may be triggered by the internal implementation of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message, or does not include the first parameter in the reported RRC reconfiguration completion message. For example, if the first parameter of the terminal device has not changed compared to the first parameter reported last time, the terminal device does not include the first parameter in the second RRC reconfiguration completion message reported to the first network device.
  • the terminal device and the network device store the content of the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent for a candidate cell, and determine whether to send the first parameter based on the stored content of the RRC reconfiguration completion message when subsequently accessing the candidate cell.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device switches to a candidate cell for the first time, it sends an RRC reconfiguration completion message; the network device (such as CU) saves the content of the completion message. When the terminal device accesses the cell again (not the first time), the terminal device may not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message, or send an empty RRC reconfiguration completion message. If the network device receives a second RRC reconfiguration completion message containing an RRC processing identifier or a configuration identifier, the network identification can find the corresponding candidate cell according to the RRC processing identifier or the configuration identifier, thereby finding the information of the completion message corresponding to the stored candidate cell for subsequent use.
  • an RRC reconfiguration completion message is sent to the network device to which the candidate cell belongs. If the terminal device accesses the candidate cell again (not for the first time), the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message, or sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • an RRC reconfiguration completion message is sent to the MN (e.g., step 5 in FIG. 9 ), which includes a reconfiguration completion message sent to the SN to which the candidate PSCell belongs.
  • the MN sends the reconfiguration completion message of the SN to the SN.
  • the base station e.g., MN or SN
  • the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent by the terminal device to the MN does not include an SN reconfiguration completion message, or includes an empty SN reconfiguration completion message, or includes an SN reconfiguration completion message that only includes an RRC processing identifier and/or a configuration identifier.
  • the terminal device or the network device releases the stored content of the RRC reconfiguration complete message:
  • L3 switching (such as inter-CU switching) is triggered
  • the above solution avoids the signaling overhead caused by information redundancy by reducing the sending of RRC messages in the subsequent switching process.
  • the problem of L1/L2 triggered mobility is solved, and the consumption of air interface resources is reduced.
  • the delay of inter-layer interaction and RRC processing is also reduced, and the delay and interruption time of L1/L2 triggered mobility are reduced.
  • FIG18 is a schematic diagram of an example of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method may be performed by a terminal device and a network device, or may be performed by a chip in a terminal device and a chip in a network device.
  • the communication method includes:
  • the terminal device receives the fifth message.
  • the fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer.
  • the first network device sends a fifth message to the terminal device.
  • the fifth message may be an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the L candidate cells may be candidate cells for L1/L2 triggered mobility, or the L candidate cells may be candidate PSCells for CPAC.
  • the terminal device accesses the third cell.
  • the third cell belongs to L candidate cells.
  • the network device to which the third cell belongs performs an access process with the terminal device. See step 9 in FIG. 6 or FIG. 7 , or step 6 in FIG. 8 , or step 8 in FIG. 9 , or step 9 and step 15 in FIG. 10 , or step 8 and step 12 in FIG. 12 .
  • the network device to which the third cell belongs may be the second network device.
  • the terminal device may initiate access to the second network device.
  • the terminal device accesses the third cell, it is evaluated that the execution condition of the third cell is satisfied, and the terminal device accesses the third cell.
  • the execution condition of evaluating the third cell here is satisfied, and reference can be made to the execution condition in the CPAC process.
  • the execution condition in step 5 of Figure 9 of the CPC process the execution condition in step 5 of Figure 9 of the CPC process.
  • the L candidate cells received by the terminal device are the L candidate PSCells of CPAC.
  • the terminal device evaluates the execution condition associated with the candidate cell.
  • the terminal device before the terminal device accesses the third cell, it receives third indication information, and the third indication information instructs the terminal device to access the third cell. Accordingly, the first network device sends the third indication information.
  • the third indication information is carried in L1/L2 signaling, such as carried in MAC CE or DCI.
  • the third indication information is carried in the L1/L2 triggered mobility cell change command, as shown in step 8 in Figure 6 or Figure 7 or steps 8 and 14 in Figure 10.
  • the target cell for indicating the cell change in the third indication information is the third cell.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the third indication information, it performs an access process to the third cell according to the content of the third indication information, such as through a RACH process or other processes (such as RACH-less).
  • the L candidate cells received by the terminal device are L candidate cells for L1/L2 triggered mobility.
  • the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the first RRC reconfiguration complete message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell.
  • the first RRC reconfiguration complete message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell, which can be understood as the terminal device setting the content or value in the first RRC reconfiguration complete message according to the configuration information of the third cell.
  • the second network device receives the first RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the second network device may be a target DU.
  • the execution order of S1820 and S1830 may be to execute S1830 first and then S1820, or to execute S1820 first and then S1830.
  • the terminal device determines whether to access the third cell for the first time.
  • the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time, the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the second network device receives the first RRC reconfiguration completion message. If the terminal device is not accessing the third cell for the first time, the terminal device does not send the first RRC reconfiguration completion message, or the terminal device sends the second RRC reconfiguration completion message. Accordingly, the second network device receives the second RRC reconfiguration completion message. That is, before executing step S1830, the terminal device needs to determine whether it is accessing the third cell for the first time or is about to access the third cell for the first time. The terminal device performs different actions according to different determined results.
  • the second RRC reconfiguration complete message does not include the first parameter.
  • the terminal device does not access the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message
  • the second RRC reconfiguration complete message sent by the terminal device to the second network device does not include the first parameter.
  • the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message, or does not include the first parameter in the reported RRC reconfiguration completion message. For example, if the first parameter of the terminal device has not changed compared to the first parameter reported last time, the terminal device does not include the first parameter in the second RRC reconfiguration completion message reported to the second network device.
  • the terminal device needs to resend the first parameter.
  • the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent by the terminal device to the second network device includes the first parameter.
  • the above scheme avoids the signaling overhead caused by information redundancy and reduces the consumption of air interface resources by reducing the sending of RRC messages in the subsequent switching process.
  • it also reduces the delay of inter-layer interaction and RRC processing, and reduces the delay and interruption time of L1/L2 triggered mobility.
  • the SN and the terminal device can use the stored message content for configuration and communication, avoiding redundant information and saving overhead.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device.
  • Figures 19 to 21 are schematic diagrams of the structures of possible communication devices provided by embodiments of the present application. These communication devices can be used to implement the functions of the terminal device or network device in the above method embodiments, and thus can also achieve the beneficial effects possessed by the above method embodiments.
  • the communication device can be a terminal device 101 as shown in Figure 1, or a network device 102 as shown in Figure 1, or a module (such as a chip) applied to a terminal device or a network device.
  • the communication device 1900 includes a processing unit 1910 and a transceiver unit 1920.
  • the communication device 1900 is used to implement the functions of the terminal device or network device in the method embodiments shown in Fig. 13 or Fig. 15 or Fig. 17 or Fig. 18 above.
  • the transceiver unit 1920 is used to receive a first message, the first message carries first information, the first information includes configuration information of M candidate cells, M is a positive integer greater than 1; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to send a second message, the second message carries M second information, the M second information corresponds to the configuration information of the M candidate cells; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to send an access request to a first cell, the first cell belongs to the M candidate cells.
  • the first message is a radio resource control RRC reconfiguration message
  • the second message is an RRC reconfiguration completion message
  • the second information includes one or more of the following information:
  • Conditional primary and secondary cells PSCell add or change related parameters
  • the second message includes an RRC reconfiguration completion message of M candidate cells, and the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells carries the M second information.
  • the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells does not include an RRC processing identifier.
  • the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive first indication information, where the first indication information indicates access to the first cell.
  • the processing unit 1910 is used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to receive, and is used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to send.
  • the transceiver unit 1920 is used to send a first message, the first message carries first information, the first information includes configuration information of M candidate cells, M is a positive integer greater than 1; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to receive a second message, the second message carries M second information, and the M second information corresponds to the configuration information of the M candidate cells.
  • the first message is an RRC reconfiguration message
  • the second message is an RRC reconfiguration completion message
  • the second information includes one or more of the following information:
  • Conditional primary and secondary cells PSCell add or change related parameters
  • the second message includes an RRC reconfiguration completion message of M candidate cells, and the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells carries the M second information.
  • the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells does not include an RRC processing identifier.
  • the processing unit 1910 is used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to receive, and is used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to send.
  • the transceiver unit 1920 is used to receive a third message, the third message includes third information, the third information includes configuration information of N candidate cells and N configuration identifiers, the N configuration identifiers are used to identify the configuration information of the N candidate cells, N is a positive integer; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to receive second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate access to a second cell, the second cell belongs to the N candidate cells; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to send a fourth message, the fourth message includes a first identifier, wherein the first identifier is used to indicate the configuration information of the second cell.
  • the third message is an RRC reconfiguration message
  • the fourth message is an RRC reconfiguration completion message
  • the processing unit 1910 is used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to receive, and is used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to send.
  • the transceiver unit 1920 Used to send a third message, the third message includes third information, the third information includes configuration information of N candidate cells, N is a positive integer; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to send second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device accesses a second cell, and the second cell belongs to the N candidate cells; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to receive a fourth message, the fourth message includes a first identifier; wherein the first identifier is used to indicate the configuration information of the second cell.
  • the third message is an RRC reconfiguration message
  • the fourth message is an RRC reconfiguration completion message
  • the processing unit 1910 is used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to receive, and is used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to send.
  • the transceiver unit 1920 is used to receive the fifth message, and the fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, L is a positive integer; the processing unit 1910 is used to determine the first access to the third cell after receiving the fifth message; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to send a first RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the first RRC reconfiguration completion message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
  • the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to evaluate whether the execution condition of the third cell is met; the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to send an access request to the third cell.
  • the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive third indication information, where the third indication information indicates access to the third cell.
  • the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to send a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes an RRC processing identifier; or, the processing unit 1910 is used to determine that it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and instruct the transceiver unit 1920 not to send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to send a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter.
  • the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that the first parameter has not changed, and the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to send a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, which does not include the first parameter; or, the processing unit 1910 is used to determine that the first parameter has not changed, and instruct the transceiver unit 1920 not to send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the first parameter is whether a measurement gap indication parameter or an uplink DC parameter is required.
  • the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information indicates that the first parameter is not carried in the first RRC reconfiguration completion message or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to receive, and is specifically used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to send.
  • the transceiver unit 1920 is used to send the fifth message, and the fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, L is a positive integer; the processing unit 1910 is used to determine whether the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time after sending the fifth message; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to receive a first RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the first RRC reconfiguration completion message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
  • the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to send the third indication information.
  • the third indication information instructs the terminal device to access the third cell.
  • the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that this is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message; the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes an RRC processing identifier; or, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that this is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the processing unit 1910 instructs the transceiver unit 1920 not to receive the RRC reconfiguration completion message; or, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that this is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the processing unit 1910 does not process the RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter.
  • the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that the first parameter has not changed, and the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, which does not include the first parameter; or, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that the first parameter has not changed, and the processing unit 1910 instructs the transceiver unit 1920 not to receive the RRC reconfiguration completion message; or, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that the first parameter has not changed, and the processing unit 1910 does not process the RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the first parameter is whether a measurement gap indication parameter or an uplink DC parameter is required.
  • the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to send fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information indicates that the terminal device does not carry the first parameter in the first RRC reconfiguration completion message or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the transceiver unit 1920 is used to receive the fifth message, and the fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, L is a positive integer; the processing unit 1910 is used to determine the first access to the third cell after receiving the fifth message; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to send a first RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the first RRC reconfiguration completion message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
  • the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to evaluate whether the execution condition of the third cell is met; the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to send an access request to the third cell.
  • the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive third indication information, where the third indication information indicates access to the third cell.
  • the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to send a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes an RRC processing identifier; or, the processing unit 1910 is used to determine that it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and instruct the transceiver unit 1920 not to send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to receive, and is specifically used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to send.
  • the transceiver unit 1920 is used to send a fifth message, and the fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer.
  • the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to send the third indication information, and the third indication information indicates that the terminal device accesses the third cell.
  • the processing unit 1910 is used to determine that the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time after sending the fifth message; the transceiver unit 1920 is used A first RRC reconfiguration complete message is received, where the first RRC reconfiguration complete message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
  • the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that this is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message; the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes an RRC processing identifier; or, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that this is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the processing unit 1910 instructs the transceiver unit 1920 not to receive the RRC reconfiguration completion message; or, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that this is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the processing unit 1910 does not process the RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that this is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter.
  • the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that the first parameter has not changed, and the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, which does not include the first parameter; or, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that the first parameter has not changed, and the processing unit 1910 instructs the transceiver unit 1920 not to receive the RRC reconfiguration completion message; or, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that the first parameter has not changed, and the processing unit 1910 does not process the RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  • the first parameter is whether a measurement gap indication parameter or an uplink DC parameter is required.
  • the embodiment of the present application proposes a communication device 2000, as shown in Figure 20, which shows a schematic block diagram of another communication device of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 2000 includes a processor 2010, the processor 2010 is coupled to at least one memory 2020, and the processor 2010 is used to read the computer program stored in the at least one memory 2020 to execute the method in any possible implementation of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application further proposes a communication device 2100.
  • the communication device 2100 includes a processor 2110 and an interface circuit 2120.
  • the processor 2110 and the interface circuit 2120 are coupled to each other.
  • the interface circuit 2120 can be a transceiver or an input-output interface.
  • the communication device 2100 may also include a memory 2130 for storing instructions executed by the processor 2110 or storing input data required by the processor 2110 to execute instructions or storing data generated after the processor 2110 executes instructions.
  • the processor 2110 is used to implement the function of the above-mentioned processing unit 1910
  • the interface circuit 2120 is used to implement the function of the above-mentioned transceiver unit 1920.
  • the terminal device chip When the above communication device is a chip applied to a terminal device, the terminal device chip implements the functions of the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
  • the terminal device chip receives information from other modules in the terminal device (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and the information is sent by the network device to the terminal device; or the terminal device chip sends information to other modules in the terminal device (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and the information is sent by the terminal device to the network device.
  • the network device chip When the above communication device is a chip applied to a network device, the network device chip implements the function of the network device in the above method embodiment.
  • the network device chip receives information from other modules in the network device (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and the information is sent by the terminal device to the network device; or the network device chip sends information to other modules in the network device (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and the information is sent by the network device to the terminal device.
  • the processor of the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities.
  • each step of the above method embodiment can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or by instructions in the form of software.
  • the above processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • the methods, steps and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed.
  • the general processor can be a microprocessor or the processor can also be any conventional processor, etc.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be directly embodied as a hardware decoding processor to be executed, or a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor to be executed.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as a random access memory, a flash memory, a read-only memory, a programmable read-only memory or an electrically erasable programmable memory, a register, etc.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory of the embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memories.
  • the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), or a flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be a random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM synchronous RAM
  • SDRAM synchronous DRAM
  • DDR SDRAM double data rate SDRAM
  • ESDRAM enhanced SDRAM
  • SLDRAM synchronous link DRAM
  • DR RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication system 2200, including a terminal device 2210 and a network device 2220 in the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG22 , a schematic block diagram of a communication system 2200 of the embodiment of the present application is shown.
  • the method steps in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented by hardware, or by a processor executing software instructions.
  • the software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, and the software modules can be stored in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, erasable programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable read-only memory, register, hard disk, mobile hard disk, CD-ROM or any other form of storage medium well known in the art.
  • An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor so that the processor can read information from the storage medium and can write information to the storage medium.
  • the storage medium can also be a component of the processor.
  • the processor and the storage medium can be located in an ASIC.
  • the ASIC can be located in a network device or a terminal device.
  • the processor and the storage medium can also be present in a network device or a terminal device as discrete components.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a user device or other programmable device.
  • the computer program or instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer program or instructions may be transmitted from one website site, computer, server or data center to another website site, computer, server or data center by wire or wireless means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that a computer can access or a data storage device such as a server or data center that integrates one or more available media.
  • the available medium may be a magnetic medium.
  • the computer readable storage medium may be a volatile or non-volatile storage medium, or may include both volatile and non-volatile storage media.
  • the size of the serial numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution.
  • the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
  • first, second, and other various digital numbers involved in the present application are only for the convenience of description and are not intended to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the specific values of the numbers (also referred to as indexes) in the present application, the specific values of the quantities, and the positions are only for illustrative purposes, are not the only form of representation, and are not intended to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the first, second, and other various digital numbers involved in the present application are also only for the convenience of description and are not intended to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • a and/or B can represent three situations: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone.
  • the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or” relationship; the term “at least one” in this application can mean “one” and "two or more”.
  • at least one of A, B and C can represent seven situations: A exists alone, B exists alone, C exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, A and C exist at the same time, C and B exist at the same time, and A, B and C exist at the same time.
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
  • Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are a communication method, device and system, which relate to the field of wireless communication, and in particular to a handover process in a wireless communication system, and can solve the problem in the prior art regarding how a terminal device responds to the configuration of a candidate cell after receiving the configuration of the candidate cell, thereby better ensuring communication between terminal devices. The method can comprise: receiving a first message, wherein the first message carries first information, and the first information comprises configuration information of M candidate cells, where M is a positive integer greater than 1; sending a second message, wherein the second message carries M pieces of second information, and the M pieces of second information correspond to the configuration information of the M candidate cells; and accessing a first cell, wherein the first cell belongs to the M candidate cells.

Description

通信方法、装置及系统Communication method, device and system 技术领域Technical Field
本申请实施例涉及通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及一种通信方法、装置及系统。The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a communication method, device, and system.
背景技术Background technique
在无线通信系统中,当用户设备(user equipment,UE)处于业务连接状态,保持业务服务时,从一个小区移动到另外一个小区,为了保证UE通信的连续性,需要进行切换。In a wireless communication system, when a user equipment (UE) is in a service connection state and maintains service, it moves from one cell to another. In order to ensure the continuity of UE communication, switching is required.
目前,第五代移动通信技术(5th-generation,5G)无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)架构考虑基站采用集中单元(centralized unit,CU)和分布单元(distributed unit,DU)独立部署的方式,以更好地满足各场景和应用的需求。在CU-DU分离的基站部署下,为了减少切换时延,进一步增强业务连续性,5G系统考虑采用层1和/或层2(L1/L2)触发的切换。其中,层1包括物理(physical layer,PHY)层,层2包括无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层和分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层。At present, the fifth-generation (5G) radio access network (RAN) architecture considers the use of independent deployment of centralized units (CU) and distributed units (DU) in base stations to better meet the needs of various scenarios and applications. In the CU-DU separated base station deployment, in order to reduce the switching delay and further enhance business continuity, the 5G system considers the use of layer 1 and/or layer 2 (L1/L2) triggered switching. Among them, layer 1 includes the physical (physical layer, PHY) layer, and layer 2 includes the radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer, the media access control (media access control, MAC) layer, and the packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer.
在L1/L2触发移动性过程中,终端设备需要先通过无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)重配消息获取候选小区的预配置信息,便于终端设备接入候选小区。终端设备接收到候选小区的配置后,如何响应候选小区的配置,以提高通信效率是亟待解决的问题。In the L1/L2 triggered mobility process, the terminal device needs to first obtain the pre-configuration information of the candidate cell through the Radio Resource Control (RRC) reconfiguration message to facilitate the terminal device to access the candidate cell. After the terminal device receives the configuration of the candidate cell, how to respond to the configuration of the candidate cell to improve communication efficiency is an urgent problem to be solved.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种通信方法、装置及系统,在终端设备进行小区切换时能够被提供更好的配置信息,提高通信效率。The present application provides a communication method, apparatus and system, which can provide better configuration information when a terminal device performs cell switching, thereby improving communication efficiency.
第一方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由终端设备执行,或者,也可以由终端设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)执行,本申请对此不作限定。为了便于描述,下面以由终端设备执行为例进行说明。In a first aspect, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a terminal device, or can also be executed by a component (such as a chip or circuit) of the terminal device, which is not limited in this application. For ease of description, the following description is taken as an example of execution by a terminal device.
该方法可以包括:接收第一消息,所述第一消息携带第一信息,所述第一信息包括M个候选小区的配置信息,M为大于1的正整数;发送第二消息,所述第二消息携带M个第二信息,所述M个第二信息与所述M个候选小区的配置信息对应;接入第一小区,所述第一小区属于所述M个候选小区。The method may include: receiving a first message, the first message carrying first information, the first information including configuration information of M candidate cells, M being a positive integer greater than 1; sending a second message, the second message carrying M second information, the M second information corresponding to the configuration information of the M candidate cells; accessing a first cell, the first cell belonging to the M candidate cells.
通过上述方案,终端设备根据候选小区的配置信息确定需要向候选小区上报的信息,并在向网络设备发送的第二消息中包含该上报的信息,用于候选小区后续更好地配置终端设备,保证了终端设备在接入该候选小区后能够被提供更好的配置信息,提高通信效率。Through the above scheme, the terminal device determines the information that needs to be reported to the candidate cell based on the configuration information of the candidate cell, and includes the reported information in the second message sent to the network device, which is used for the candidate cell to better configure the terminal device in the future, ensuring that the terminal device can be provided with better configuration information after accessing the candidate cell, thereby improving communication efficiency.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一消息为无线资源控制RRC重配消息,所述第二消息为RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, the first message is a radio resource control RRC reconfiguration message, and the second message is an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二信息包括以下信息中的一项或多项:In one possible design, the second information includes one or more of the following information:
上行直流参数;Uplink DC parameters;
条件主辅小区PSCell添加或变更相关参数;Conditional primary and secondary cells PSCell add or change related parameters;
测量报告可用指示;Measurement report available indication;
测量间隙需求指示。Measuring gap requirement indication.
通过在第二信息中包括上述参数,使得网络设备在收到上述信息后,能更好地配置终端 设备的资源或测量,提高通信效率。By including the above parameters in the second information, the network device can better configure the terminal after receiving the above information. resources or measurements of equipment to improve communication efficiency.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二消息包括M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息,所述M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息携带所述M个第二信息。在一种可能的设计中,所述M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息不包括RRC处理标识。In one possible design, the second message includes RRC reconfiguration completion messages of M candidate cells, and the RRC reconfiguration completion messages of the M candidate cells carry the M second information. In one possible design, the RRC reconfiguration completion messages of the M candidate cells do not include an RRC processing identifier.
通过在RRC重配完成消息不包括RRC处理标识,避免了终端设备无法设置RRC处理标识取值的问题,也避免了网络设备接收到RRC处理标识后无法确定对应的RRC过程或对应错误的RRC处理过程的问题。By not including the RRC processing identifier in the RRC reconfiguration completion message, the problem of the terminal device being unable to set the RRC processing identifier value is avoided, and the problem of the network device being unable to determine the corresponding RRC process or the corresponding erroneous RRC processing process after receiving the RRC processing identifier is also avoided.
在一种可能的设计中,接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示接入所述第一小区。In one possible design, first indication information is received, where the first indication information indicates access to the first cell.
第二方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由网络设备执行,或者,也可以由网络设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)执行,本申请对此不作限定。为了便于描述,下面以由网络设备执行为例进行说明。In a second aspect, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a network device, or can also be executed by a component (such as a chip or circuit) of the network device, which is not limited in this application. For ease of description, the following is an example of execution by a network device.
该方法可以包括:发送第一消息,所述第一消息携带第一信息,所述第一信息包括M个候选小区的配置信息,M为大于1的正整数;接收第二消息,所述第二消息携带M个第二信息,所述M个第二信息与所述M个候选小区的配置信息对应。The method may include: sending a first message, the first message carrying first information, the first information including configuration information of M candidate cells, M being a positive integer greater than 1; receiving a second message, the second message carrying M second information, the M second information corresponding to the configuration information of the M candidate cells.
通过上述方案,终端设备根据候选小区的配置信息确定需要向候选小区上报的信息,并在向网络设备发送的第二消息中包含该上报的信息,用于候选小区后续更好地配置终端设备,保证了终端设备在接入该候选小区后能够被提供更好的配置信息,提高通信效率。Through the above scheme, the terminal device determines the information that needs to be reported to the candidate cell based on the configuration information of the candidate cell, and includes the reported information in the second message sent to the network device, which is used for the candidate cell to better configure the terminal device in the future, ensuring that the terminal device can be provided with better configuration information after accessing the candidate cell, thereby improving communication efficiency.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一消息为RRC重配消息,所述第二消息为RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, the first message is an RRC reconfiguration message, and the second message is an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二信息包括以下信息中的一项或多项:In one possible design, the second information includes one or more of the following information:
上行直流参数;Uplink DC parameters;
条件主辅小区PSCell添加或变更相关参数;Conditional primary and secondary cells PSCell add or change related parameters;
测量报告可用指示;Measurement report available indication;
测量间隙需求指示。Measuring gap requirement indication.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二消息包括M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息,所述M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息携带所述M个第二信息。In one possible design, the second message includes an RRC reconfiguration completion message of M candidate cells, and the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells carries the M second information.
在一种可能的设计中,所述M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息不包括RRC处理标识。In one possible design, the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells does not include an RRC processing identifier.
第三方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由终端设备执行,或者,也可以由终端设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)执行,本申请对此不作限定。为了便于描述,下面以由终端设备执行为例进行说明。In a third aspect, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a terminal device, or can also be executed by a component (such as a chip or circuit) of the terminal device, which is not limited in this application. For ease of description, the following description is taken as an example of execution by a terminal device.
该方法可以包括:接收第三消息,所述第三消息包括第三信息,所述第三信息中包括N个候选小区的配置信息和N个配置标识,所述N个配置标识用于标识所述N个候选小区的配置信息,N为正整数;接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示接入到第二小区,所述第二小区属于所述N个候选小区;发送第四消息,所述第四消息包括第一标识;其中,所述第一标识用于指示所述第二小区的配置信息。The method may include: receiving a third message, the third message including third information, the third information including configuration information of N candidate cells and N configuration identifiers, the N configuration identifiers are used to identify the configuration information of the N candidate cells, N is a positive integer; receiving second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate access to a second cell, the second cell belongs to the N candidate cells; sending a fourth message, the fourth message including a first identifier; wherein the first identifier is used to indicate the configuration information of the second cell.
通过上述方案,将配置标识与候选小区的配置信息关联起来,使得切换后的候选小区可以获知RRC重配完成消息对应的候选小区或候选小区配置,一方面解决了由于没有RRC重配消息而导致的候选小区无法获知RRC重配完成消息的问题,另一方面还将终端设备发送的信息与目标小区配置相关联,保证了候选小区能在终端设备切换后正确地配置终端设备,保证正常通信。相比于使用RRC处理标识来关联,第一标识可以有更多的取值, 避免了占用较多的RRC处理标识带来的网络配置受限的问题。Through the above scheme, the configuration identifier is associated with the configuration information of the candidate cell, so that the candidate cell after switching can obtain the candidate cell or candidate cell configuration corresponding to the RRC reconfiguration completion message. On the one hand, it solves the problem that the candidate cell cannot obtain the RRC reconfiguration completion message due to the absence of the RRC reconfiguration message. On the other hand, it also associates the information sent by the terminal device with the target cell configuration, ensuring that the candidate cell can correctly configure the terminal device after the terminal device is switched to ensure normal communication. Compared with using the RRC processing identifier for association, the first identifier can have more values, This avoids the problem of limited network configuration caused by occupying a large number of RRC processing identifiers.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第三消息为RRC重配消息,所述第四消息为RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, the third message is an RRC reconfiguration message, and the fourth message is an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
第四方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由网络设备执行,或者,也可以由网络设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)执行,本申请对此不作限定。为了便于描述,下面以由网络设备执行为例进行说明。In a fourth aspect, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a network device, or can also be executed by a component (such as a chip or circuit) of the network device, which is not limited in this application. For ease of description, the following is an example of execution by a network device.
该方法可以包括:发送第三消息,所述第三消息包括第三信息,所述第三信息中包括N个候选小区的配置信息,N为正整数;发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示终端设备接入到第二小区,所述第二小区属于所述N个候选小区;接收第四消息,所述第四消息包括第一标识;其中,所述第一标识用于指示所述第二小区的配置信息。The method may include: sending a third message, the third message including third information, the third information including configuration information of N candidate cells, N is a positive integer; sending second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device accesses a second cell, the second cell belongs to the N candidate cells; receiving a fourth message, the fourth message including a first identifier; wherein the first identifier is used to indicate the configuration information of the second cell.
通过上述方案,将配置标识与候选小区的配置信息关联起来,使得切换后的候选小区可以获知RRC重配完成消息对应的候选小区或候选小区配置,一方面解决了由于没有RRC重配消息而导致的候选小区无法获知RRC重配完成消息的问题,另一方面还将终端设备发送的信息与目标小区配置相关联,保证了候选小区能在终端设备切换后正确地配置终端设备,保证正常通信。相比于使用RRC处理标识来关联,第一标识可以有更多的取值,避免了占用较多的RRC处理标识带来的网络配置受限的问题。Through the above scheme, the configuration identifier is associated with the configuration information of the candidate cell, so that the candidate cell after switching can obtain the candidate cell or candidate cell configuration corresponding to the RRC reconfiguration completion message. On the one hand, it solves the problem that the candidate cell cannot obtain the RRC reconfiguration completion message due to the lack of RRC reconfiguration message. On the other hand, it also associates the information sent by the terminal device with the target cell configuration, ensuring that the candidate cell can correctly configure the terminal device after the terminal device is switched to ensure normal communication. Compared with using the RRC processing identifier for association, the first identifier can have more values, avoiding the problem of limited network configuration caused by occupying more RRC processing identifiers.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第三消息为RRC重配消息,所述第四消息为RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, the third message is an RRC reconfiguration message, and the fourth message is an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
第五方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由终端设备执行,或者,也可以由终端设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)执行,本申请对此不作限定。为了便于描述,下面以由终端设备执行为例进行说明。In a fifth aspect, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a terminal device, or can also be executed by a component (such as a chip or circuit) of the terminal device, and this application does not limit this. For ease of description, the following is an example of execution by a terminal device.
该方法可以包括:接收第五消息,所述第五消息包括L个候选小区的配置信息,L为正整数;如果收到第五消息后第一次接入第三小区,则发送第一RRC重配完成消息,所述第一RRC重配完成消息中包括所述第三小区对应的配置信息,所述第三小区属于所述L个候选小区。The method may include: receiving a fifth message, the fifth message including configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer; if the third cell is accessed for the first time after receiving the fifth message, sending a first RRC reconfiguration completion message, the first RRC reconfiguration completion message including configuration information corresponding to the third cell, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
通过上述方案,减少后续切换过程中的RRC消息的发送,避免了信息冗余造成的信令开销的问题,降低了空口资源的消耗。Through the above solution, the sending of RRC messages in the subsequent switching process is reduced, the problem of signaling overhead caused by information redundancy is avoided, and the consumption of air interface resources is reduced.
在一种可能的设计中,评估所述第三小区的执行条件被满足,接入所述第三小区。In one possible design, it is evaluated that an execution condition of the third cell is met, and the third cell is accessed.
在一种可能的设计中,接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示接入所述第三小区。In one possible design, third indication information is received, where the third indication information indicates access to the third cell.
在一种可能的设计中,如果收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中仅包括RRC处理标识;或者,如果收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,不发送RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, if it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, a second RRC reconfiguration completion message is sent, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes the RRC processing identifier; or, if it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the RRC reconfiguration completion message is not sent.
在一种可能的设计中,如果收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数。In a possible design, if it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, a second RRC reconfiguration completion message is sent, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter.
通过这种方式,在非第一次接入某个小区时,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销,节省了传输资源。In this way, when a cell is not accessed for the first time, repeated reporting of some parameters is reduced, signaling overhead is reduced, and transmission resources are saved.
在一种可能的设计中,如果第一参数没有变化,发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数;或者,如果第一参数没有变化,不发送RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, if the first parameter does not change, a second RRC reconfiguration complete message is sent, and the second RRC reconfiguration complete message does not include the first parameter; alternatively, if the first parameter does not change, the RRC reconfiguration complete message is not sent.
通过这种方式,在第一参数没有变化时,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销, 节省了传输资源。In this way, when the first parameter does not change, repeated reporting of some parameters is reduced, and signaling overhead is reduced. Saves transmission resources.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参数为是否需要测量间隙指示参数或上行直流参数中的至少一个。In one possible design, the first parameter is whether to need to measure at least one of a gap indication parameter and an uplink DC parameter.
在第一参数比特较多时,通过这种方式,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销,节省了传输资源。When the first parameter bits are relatively large, this method can reduce repeated reporting of some parameters, reduce signaling overhead, and save transmission resources.
在一种可能的设计中,接收第四指示信息,第四指示信息指示在第一RRC重配完成消息或第二RRC重配完成消息中不携带第一参数。第六方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以包括:第一网络设备向终端设备发送第五消息,所述第五消息包括L个候选小区的配置信息,L为正整数;如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后第一次接入第三小区,则所述终端设备向所述第一网络设备发送第一RRC重配完成消息,所述第一RRC重配完成消息中包括所述第三小区对应的配置信息,所述第三小区属于所述L个候选小区。In one possible design, fourth indication information is received, and the fourth indication information indicates that the first parameter is not carried in the first RRC reconfiguration completion message or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message. In a sixth aspect, a communication method is provided, which may include: a first network device sends a fifth message to a terminal device, and the fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer; if the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message to the first network device, and the first RRC reconfiguration completion message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
该方法中的第一网络设备可以为网络设备,或者,也可以为网络设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)。该方法中的终端设备可以为终端设备或者终端设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)。The first network device in the method may be a network device, or may be a component of a network device (such as a chip or circuit). The terminal device in the method may be a terminal device or a component of a terminal device (such as a chip or circuit).
通过上述方案,减少后续切换过程中的RRC消息的发送,避免了信息冗余造成的信令开销的问题,降低了空口资源的消耗。Through the above solution, the sending of RRC messages in the subsequent switching process is reduced, the problem of signaling overhead caused by information redundancy is avoided, and the consumption of air interface resources is reduced.
在一种可能的设计中,所述终端设备评估所述第三小区的执行条件被满足,接入所述第三小区。In one possible design, the terminal device evaluates that the execution conditions of the third cell are met, and accesses the third cell.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一网络设备向所述终端设备发送所述第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示所述终端设备接入所述第三小区。In one possible design, the first network device sends the third indication information to the terminal device, and the third indication information instructs the terminal device to access the third cell.
在一种可能的设计中,如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,所述终端设备向所述第一网络设备发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中仅包括RRC处理标识;或者,如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,所述终端设备不发送RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the first network device, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes an RRC processing identifier; or, if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,所述终端设备向所述第一网络设备发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数。In a possible design, if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the first network device, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter.
通过这种方式,在非第一次接入某个小区时,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销,节省了传输资源。In this way, when a cell is not accessed for the first time, repeated reporting of some parameters is reduced, signaling overhead is reduced, and transmission resources are saved.
在一种可能的设计中,如果第一参数没有变化,所述终端设备向所述第一网络设备发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数;或者,如果第一参数没有变化,所述终端设备不发送RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, if the first parameter does not change, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the first network device, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter; or, if the first parameter does not change, the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
通过这种方式,在第一参数没有变化时,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销,节省了传输资源。In this way, when the first parameter does not change, repeated reporting of some parameters is reduced, signaling overhead is reduced, and transmission resources are saved.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参数为是否需要测量间隙指示参数或上行直流参数中的至少一个。In one possible design, the first parameter is whether to need to measure at least one of a gap indication parameter and an uplink DC parameter.
在第一参数比特较多时,通过这种方式,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销,节省了传输资源。When the first parameter bits are relatively large, this method can reduce repeated reporting of some parameters, reduce signaling overhead, and save transmission resources.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一网络设备向所述终端设备发送第四指示信息,第四指示信息指示所述终端设备在第一RRC重配完成消息或第二RRC重配完成消息中不携带第一参数。 In one possible design, the first network device sends fourth indication information to the terminal device, and the fourth indication information indicates that the terminal device does not carry the first parameter in the first RRC reconfiguration completion message or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message.
第七方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以包括:第一网络设备向终端设备发送第五消息,所述第五消息包括L个候选小区的配置信息,L为正整数;如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后第一次接入第三小区,则所述终端设备向第二网络设备发送第一RRC重配完成消息,所述第一RRC重配完成消息中包括所述第三小区对应的配置信息,所述第三小区属于所述L个候选小区;所述第二网络设备是第三小区所属的网络设备。In the seventh aspect, a communication method is provided, which may include: a first network device sends a fifth message to a terminal device, the fifth message including configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer; if the terminal device accesses a third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message to a second network device, the first RRC reconfiguration completion message including configuration information corresponding to the third cell, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells; the second network device is the network device to which the third cell belongs.
该方法中的第一网络设备或第二网络设备可以为网络设备,或者,也可以为网络设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)。该方法中的终端设备可以为终端设备或者终端设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)。The first network device or the second network device in the method may be a network device, or may be a component of a network device (such as a chip or circuit). The terminal device in the method may be a terminal device or a component of a terminal device (such as a chip or circuit).
通过上述方案,减少后续切换过程中的RRC消息的发送,避免了信息冗余造成的信令开销的问题,降低了空口资源的消耗。Through the above solution, the sending of RRC messages in the subsequent switching process is reduced, the problem of signaling overhead caused by information redundancy is avoided, and the consumption of air interface resources is reduced.
在一种可能的设计中,所述终端设备评估所述第三小区的执行条件被满足,接入所述第三小区。In one possible design, the terminal device evaluates that the execution conditions of the third cell are met, and accesses the third cell.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一网络设备向所述终端设备发送所述第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示所述终端设备接入所述第三小区。In one possible design, the first network device sends the third indication information to the terminal device, and the third indication information instructs the terminal device to access the third cell.
在一种可能的设计中,如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,所述终端设备向所述第二网络设备发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中仅包括RRC处理标识;或者,如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,所述终端设备不发送RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the second network device, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes the RRC processing identifier; or, if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,所述终端设备向所述第二网络设备发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数。In one possible design, if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the second network device, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter.
通过这种方式,在非第一次接入某个小区时,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销,节省了传输资源。In this way, when a cell is not accessed for the first time, repeated reporting of some parameters is reduced, signaling overhead is reduced, and transmission resources are saved.
在一种可能的设计中,如果第一参数没有变化,所述终端设备向所述第二网络设备发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数;或者,如果第一参数没有变化,所述终端设备不发送RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, if the first parameter does not change, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the second network device, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter; or, if the first parameter does not change, the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
通过这种方式,在第一参数没有变化时,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销,节省了传输资源。In this way, when the first parameter does not change, repeated reporting of some parameters is reduced, signaling overhead is reduced, and transmission resources are saved.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参数为是否需要测量间隙指示参数或上行直流参数中的至少一个。In one possible design, the first parameter is whether to need to measure at least one of a gap indication parameter and an uplink DC parameter.
在第一参数比特较多时,通过这种方式,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销,节省了传输资源。When the first parameter bits are relatively large, this method can reduce repeated reporting of some parameters, reduce signaling overhead, and save transmission resources.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一网络设备向所述终端设备发送第四指示信息,第四指示信息指示所述终端设备在第一RRC重配完成消息或第二RRC重配完成消息中不携带第一参数。In one possible design, the first network device sends fourth indication information to the terminal device, and the fourth indication information indicates that the terminal device does not carry the first parameter in the first RRC reconfiguration completion message or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message.
第八方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由终端设备执行,或者,也可以由终端设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)执行,本申请对此不作限定。为了便于描述,下面以由终端设备执行为例进行说明。In an eighth aspect, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a terminal device, or can also be executed by a component (such as a chip or circuit) of the terminal device, and this application does not limit this. For ease of description, the following is an example of execution by a terminal device.
该方法可以包括:接收第五消息,所述第五消息包括L个候选小区的配置信息,L为正整数;如果收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数,所述第三小区属于所述L个候选小区。 The method may include: receiving a fifth message, the fifth message including configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer; if it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, sending a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
通过这种方式,在非第一次接入某个小区时,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销,节省了传输资源。In this way, when a cell is not accessed for the first time, repeated reporting of some parameters is reduced, signaling overhead is reduced, and transmission resources are saved.
在一种可能的设计中,如果收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,且第一参数没有变化,发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数;或者,如果收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,且第一参数没有变化,不发送RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, if it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message and the first parameter has not changed, a second RRC reconfiguration completion message is sent, and the first parameter is not included in the second RRC reconfiguration completion message; or, if it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message and the first parameter has not changed, no RRC reconfiguration completion message is sent.
通过这种方式,在第一参数没有变化时,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销,节省了传输资源。In this way, when the first parameter does not change, repeated reporting of some parameters is reduced, signaling overhead is reduced, and transmission resources are saved.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参数为是否需要测量间隙指示参数或上行直流参数中的至少一个。In one possible design, the first parameter is whether to need to measure at least one of a gap indication parameter and an uplink DC parameter.
在第一参数比特较多时,通过这种方式,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销,节省了传输资源。When the first parameter bits are relatively large, this method can reduce repeated reporting of some parameters, reduce signaling overhead, and save transmission resources.
在一种可能的设计中,接收第四指示信息,第四指示信息指示在第二RRC重配完成消息中不携带第一参数。In one possible design, fourth indication information is received, and the fourth indication information indicates that the first parameter is not carried in the second RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,评估所述第三小区的执行条件被满足,接入所述第三小区。In one possible design, it is evaluated that an execution condition of the third cell is met, and the third cell is accessed.
在一种可能的设计中,接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示接入所述第三小区。In one possible design, third indication information is received, where the third indication information indicates access to the third cell.
第九方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以包括:第一网络设备向终端设备发送第五消息,所述第五消息包括L个候选小区的配置信息,L为正整数;如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,所述终端设备向所述第一网络设备发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数,所述第三小区属于所述L个候选小区。In the ninth aspect, a communication method is provided, which may include: a first network device sends a fifth message to a terminal device, the fifth message including configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer; if the terminal device does not access the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the first network device, the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
该方法中的第一网络设备可以为网络设备,或者,也可以为网络设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)。该方法中的终端设备可以为终端设备或者终端设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)。The first network device in the method may be a network device, or may be a component of a network device (such as a chip or circuit). The terminal device in the method may be a terminal device or a component of a terminal device (such as a chip or circuit).
通过这种方式,在非第一次接入某个小区时,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销,节省了传输资源。In this way, when a cell is not accessed for the first time, repeated reporting of some parameters is reduced, signaling overhead is reduced, and transmission resources are saved.
在一种可能的设计中,如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,且所述第一参数没有变化,所述终端设备向所述第一网络设备发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数;或者,如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,且所述第一参数没有变化,所述终端设备不发送RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the first parameter has not changed, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the first network device, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter; or, if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the first parameter has not changed, the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
通过这种方式,在第一参数没有变化时,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销,节省了传输资源。In this way, when the first parameter does not change, repeated reporting of some parameters is reduced, signaling overhead is reduced, and transmission resources are saved.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参数为是否需要测量间隙指示参数或上行直流参数中的至少一个。In one possible design, the first parameter is whether to need to measure at least one of a gap indication parameter and an uplink DC parameter.
在第一参数比特较多时,通过这种方式,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销,节省了传输资源。When the first parameter bits are relatively large, this method can reduce repeated reporting of some parameters, reduce signaling overhead, and save transmission resources.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一网络设备向所述终端设备发送第四指示信息,第四指示信息指示所述终端设备在第二RRC重配完成消息中不携带第一参数。In one possible design, the first network device sends fourth indication information to the terminal device, and the fourth indication information indicates that the terminal device does not carry the first parameter in the second RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,所述终端设备评估所述第三小区的执行条件被满足,接入所述第三小区。In one possible design, the terminal device evaluates that the execution conditions of the third cell are met, and accesses the third cell.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一网络设备向所述终端设备发送所述第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示所述终端设备接入所述第三小区。 In one possible design, the first network device sends the third indication information to the terminal device, and the third indication information instructs the terminal device to access the third cell.
第十方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以包括:第一网络设备向终端设备发送第五消息,所述第五消息包括L个候选小区的配置信息,L为正整数;如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,所述终端设备向所述第二网络设备发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数,所述第三小区属于所述L个候选小区。In the tenth aspect, a communication method is provided, which may include: a first network device sends a fifth message to a terminal device, the fifth message including configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer; if the terminal device does not access the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the second network device, the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
该方法中的第一网络设备或第二网络设备可以为网络设备,或者,也可以为网络设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)。该方法中的终端设备可以为终端设备或者终端设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)。The first network device or the second network device in the method may be a network device, or may be a component of a network device (such as a chip or circuit). The terminal device in the method may be a terminal device or a component of a terminal device (such as a chip or circuit).
通过这种方式,在非第一次接入某个小区时,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销,节省了传输资源。In this way, when a cell is not accessed for the first time, repeated reporting of some parameters is reduced, signaling overhead is reduced, and transmission resources are saved.
在一种可能的设计中,如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,且所述第一参数没有变化,所述终端设备向所述第二网络设备发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数;或者,如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,且所述第一参数没有变化,所述终端设备不发送RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the first parameter has not changed, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the second network device, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter; or, if it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the first parameter has not changed, the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
通过这种方式,在第一参数没有变化时,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销,节省了传输资源。In this way, when the first parameter does not change, repeated reporting of some parameters is reduced, signaling overhead is reduced, and transmission resources are saved.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参数为是否需要测量间隙指示参数或上行直流参数中的至少一个。In one possible design, the first parameter is whether to need to measure at least one of a gap indication parameter and an uplink DC parameter.
在第一参数比特较多时,通过这种方式,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销,节省了传输资源。When the first parameter bits are relatively large, this method can reduce repeated reporting of some parameters, reduce signaling overhead, and save transmission resources.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一网络设备向所述终端设备发送第四指示信息,第四指示信息指示所述终端设备在第二RRC重配完成消息中不携带第一参数。In one possible design, the first network device sends fourth indication information to the terminal device, and the fourth indication information indicates that the terminal device does not carry the first parameter in the second RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,所述终端设备评估所述第三小区的执行条件被满足,接入所述第三小区。In one possible design, the terminal device evaluates that the execution conditions of the third cell are met, and accesses the third cell.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一网络设备向所述终端设备发送所述第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示所述终端设备接入所述第三小区。In one possible design, the first network device sends the third indication information to the terminal device, and the third indication information instructs the terminal device to access the third cell.
相应的,本申请还提供了一种通信设备,该设备可以实现第一方面至第七方面任一所述的通信方法。例如,该设备可以是终端设备或网络设备,还可以是其他能够实现上述通信方法的设备,其可以通过软件、硬件、或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现上述方法。Accordingly, the present application also provides a communication device, which can implement any of the communication methods described in aspects 1 to 7. For example, the device can be a terminal device or a network device, or other device capable of implementing the above communication method, which can implement the above method through software, hardware, or hardware executing corresponding software.
在一种可能的设计中,该设备可以包括处理器和存储器。该处理器被配置为支持该设备执行上述任一方面所述的方法中相应的功能。存储器用于与处理器耦合,其保存该设备必要的程序指令和数据。另外该设备中还可以包括通信接口,用于支持该设备与其他设备之间的通信。该通信接口可以是收发器或收发电路。In one possible design, the device may include a processor and a memory. The processor is configured to support the device to perform the corresponding functions of the method described in any one of the above aspects. The memory is used to couple with the processor, and stores the necessary program instructions and data of the device. In addition, the device may also include a communication interface for supporting communication between the device and other devices. The communication interface may be a transceiver or a transceiver circuit.
又一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信系统,该系统包括上述方面所述的通信设备。On the other hand, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, which includes the communication device described in the above aspects.
本申请的又一方面提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述各方面所述的方法。Another aspect of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, wherein the computer-readable storage medium stores instructions, and when the computer-readable storage medium is run on a computer, the computer executes the methods described in the above aspects.
本申请的又一方面提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述各方面所述的方法。Another aspect of the present application provides a computer program product comprising instructions, which, when executed on a computer, enables the computer to execute the methods described in the above aspects.
本申请还提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统中包括处理器,还可以包括存储器,用于实现上述任一方面所述的方法。The present application also provides a chip system, which includes a processor and may also include a memory, for implementing the method described in any of the above aspects.
上述提供的任一种设备或计算机存储介质或计算机程序产品或芯片系统或通信系统均用于执行上文所提供的对应的方法,因此,其所能达到的有益效果可参考上文提供的对应的方 法中对应方案的有益效果,此处不再赘述。Any of the above-mentioned devices, computer storage media, computer program products, chip systems, or communication systems are used to execute the corresponding methods provided above. Therefore, the beneficial effects that can be achieved can refer to the corresponding methods provided above. The beneficial effects of the corresponding scheme in the law will not be elaborated here.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
图1是本申请实施例提供的一种网络架构的示意图。FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图2是本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的网络架构示意图。FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of a network device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图3是本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的CU-DU分离示意图。FIG3 is a schematic diagram of CU-DU separation of a network device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图4是本申请实施例提供的一种双连接的场景示意图。FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a dual connection scenario provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图5是本申请实施例提供的一种切换的交互示意图。FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a switching interaction provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图6是本申请实施例提供的一种CU内DU间L1/L2触发移动性的交互示意图。FIG6 is a schematic diagram of an interaction of L1/L2 triggered mobility between DUs within a CU provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图7是本申请实施例提供的一种CU内DU内L1/L2触发移动性的交互示意图。FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an interaction of intra-CU and intra-DU L1/L2 triggered mobility provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图8是本申请实施例提供的一种CPA的交互示意图。FIG8 is a schematic diagram of a CPA interaction provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图9是本申请实施例提供的一种CPC的交互示意图。FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of an interaction of CPC provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图10是本申请实施例提供的一种连续L1/L2触发移动性的交互示意图。FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of an interaction of continuous L1/L2 triggered mobility provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图11是本申请实施例提供的一种连续CPC的场景示意图。FIG11 is a schematic diagram of a continuous CPC scenario provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图12是本申请实施例提供的一种连续CPC的交互示意图。FIG12 is a schematic diagram of a continuous CPC interaction provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图13是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的交互示意图。FIG. 13 is an interactive schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图14是本申请实施例提供的又一种L1/L2触发移动性的交互示意图。FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of another interaction of L1/L2 triggered mobility provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图15是本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的交互示意图。FIG. 15 is an interactive schematic diagram of another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图16是本申请实施例提供的又一种L1/L2触发移动性的交互示意图。FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of another interaction of L1/L2 triggered mobility provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图17是本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法的交互示意图。FIG. 17 is an interactive schematic diagram of yet another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图18是本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法的交互示意图。FIG18 is an interactive schematic diagram of another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图19为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置示意图。FIG19 is a schematic diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图20为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置示意图。FIG20 is a schematic diagram of another communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图21为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信装置示意图。FIG21 is a schematic diagram of another communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图22为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统示意图。Figure 22 is a schematic diagram of a communication system provided in an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:全球移动通讯(Global System of Mobile communication,GSM)系统、码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(General Packet Radio Service,GPRS)、长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)通信系统、第五代(5th Generation,5G)移动通信系统或新空口(new radio,NR)。其中,5G移动通信系统可以是非独立组网(non-standalone,NSA)或独立组网(standalone,SA)。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, for example: Global System of Mobile communication (GSM) system, Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) system, Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) system, General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (TDD), universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) communication system, fifth generation (5G) mobile communication system or new radio (NR). Among them, the 5G mobile communication system can be a non-standalone (NSA) or an independent network (SA).
本申请提供的技术方案还可以应用于机器类通信(machine type communication,MTC)、机器间通信长期演进技术(long term evolution-machine,LTE-M)、设备到设备(device-to device,D2D)网络、机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)网络、物联网(internet of things,IoT)网络或者其他网络。其中,IoT网络例如可以包括车联网。其中,车联网系统中的通信方式 统称为车到其他设备(vehicle to X,V2X,X可以代表任何事物),例如,该V2X可以包括:车辆到车辆(vehicle to vehicle,V2V)通信,车辆与基础设施(vehicle to infrastructure,V2I)通信、车辆与行人之间的通信(vehicle to pedestrian,V2P)或车辆与网络(vehicle to network,V2N)通信等。The technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to machine type communication (MTC), long term evolution-machine (LTE-M), device-to-device (D2D) network, machine-to-machine (M2M) network, Internet of Things (IoT) network or other networks. Among them, IoT network can include Internet of Vehicles, for example. Among them, the communication mode in the Internet of Vehicles system Collectively referred to as vehicle to other devices (vehicle to X, V2X, X can represent anything), for example, the V2X may include: vehicle to vehicle (vehicle to vehicle, V2V) communication, vehicle to infrastructure (vehicle to infrastructure, V2I) communication, vehicle to pedestrian (vehicle to pedestrian, V2P) or vehicle to network (vehicle to network, V2N) communication, etc.
本申请提供的技术方案还可以应用于未来的通信系统,如第六代(6th Generation,6G)移动通信系统等。本申请对此不作限定。The technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to future communication systems, such as the sixth generation (6G) mobile communication system. This application does not limit this.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备也可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。终端可以广泛应用于各种场景,例如,设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)、车物(vehicle to everything,V2X)通信、机器类通信(machine-type communication,MTC)、物联网(internet of things,IOT)、虚拟现实、增强现实、工业控制、自动驾驶、远程医疗、智能电网、智能家具、智能办公、智能穿戴、智能交通、智慧城市等。终端可以是手机、平板电脑、带无线收发功能的电脑、可穿戴设备、车辆、无人机、直升机、飞机、轮船、机器人、机械臂、智能家居设备等。本申请的实施例对终端所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。In the embodiments of the present application, the terminal device may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device. The terminal can be widely used in various scenarios, for example, device-to-device (D2D), vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication, machine-type communication (MTC), Internet of Things (IOT), virtual reality, augmented reality, industrial control, automatic driving, telemedicine, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, etc. The terminal may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a computer with wireless transceiver function, a wearable device, a vehicle, a drone, a helicopter, an airplane, a ship, a robot, a mechanical arm, a smart home device, etc. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the terminal.
终端设备可以是一种向用户提供语音/数据连通性的设备,例如,具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。目前,一些终端的举例可以为:手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑(如笔记本电脑、掌上电脑等)、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device,MID)、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端(例如,电视机等家电、智慧盒子、游戏机)、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等。A terminal device can be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to users, such as a handheld device with wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, etc. At present, some examples of terminals can be: mobile phones, tablet computers, computers with wireless transceiver functions (such as laptops, PDAs, etc.), mobile Internet devices (mobile internet devices, MIDs), virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) devices, augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) devices, wireless terminals in industrial control (industrial control), wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, etc. Wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes (for example, home appliances such as televisions, smart boxes, game consoles), cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (PDAs), handheld devices with wireless communication functions, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, vehicle-mounted devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in 5G networks, or terminal devices in future evolved public land mobile networks (PLMNs), etc.
其中,可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。Among them, wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices, which are a general term for the intelligent design and development of wearable devices for daily wear using wearable technology, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes. Wearable devices are portable devices that are worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only hardware devices, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. Broadly speaking, wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, and independent of smartphones to achieve complete or partial functions, such as smart watches or smart glasses, as well as those that only focus on a certain type of application function and need to be used in conjunction with other devices such as smartphones, such as various smart bracelets and smart jewelry for vital sign monitoring.
此外,终端设备还可以是物联网(Internet of things,IoT)系统中的终端设备。IoT是未来信息技术发展的重要组成部分,其主要技术特点是将物品通过通信技术与网络连接,从而实现人机互连,物物互连的智能化网络。IoT技术可以通过例如窄带(narrow band,NB)技术,做到海量连接,深度覆盖,终端省电。In addition, the terminal device can also be a terminal device in the Internet of Things (IoT) system. IoT is an important part of the future development of information technology. Its main technical feature is to connect objects to the network through communication technology, thereby realizing an intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and object-to-object interconnection. IoT technology can achieve massive connections, deep coverage, and terminal power saving through narrowband (NB) technology, for example.
在本申请实施例中,该终端设备还可以是车辆或整车,通过车联网可以实现通信,也可以是位于车辆内(例如放置在车辆内或安装在车辆内)的部件,即车载终端设备、车载模块或者车载单元(on-board unit,OBU)。 In an embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may also be a vehicle or a complete vehicle, which can achieve communication through the Internet of Vehicles, or it may be a component located in the vehicle (for example, placed in the vehicle or installed in the vehicle), that is, a vehicle-mounted terminal device, a vehicle-mounted module or a vehicle-mounted unit (on-board unit, OBU).
此外,终端设备还可以包括智能打印机、火车探测器、加油站等传感器,主要功能包括收集数据(部分终端设备)、接收网络设备的控制信息与下行数据,并发送电磁波,向网络设备传输上行数据。In addition, terminal devices can also include sensors such as smart printers, train detectors, and gas stations. Their main functions include collecting data (part of the terminal equipment), receiving control information and downlink data from network devices, and sending electromagnetic waves to transmit uplink data to network devices.
本申请实施例中,网络设备可以是任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备。该设备包括但不限于:演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(baseband unit,BBU),无线保真(wireless fidelity,WiFi)系统中的接入点(access point,AP)、无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission point,TP)或者发送接收点(transmission and reception point,TRP)等,还可以为5G,如,NR,系统中的gNB,或,传输点(TRP或TP),5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板,或者,还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点,如基带单元(BBU),或,分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),或者下一代通信6G系统中的基站等。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device can be any device with wireless transceiver function. The device includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (e.g., home evolved Node B, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi), etc. i) The access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP) or transmission and reception point (TRP) in the system, and can also be a gNB in a 5G, such as NR, system, or a transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group of (including multiple antenna panels) antenna panels of a base station in a 5G system, or a network node constituting a gNB or a transmission point, such as a baseband unit (BBU), or a distributed unit (DU), or a base station in a next generation communication 6G system, etc.
网络设备为小区提供服务,终端设备通过网络设备分配的传输资源(例如,频域资源,或者说,频谱资源)与小区进行通信,该小区可以属于宏基站(例如,宏eNB或宏gNB等),也可以属于小小区(small cell)对应的基站,这里的小小区可以包括:城市小区(metro cell)、微小区(micro cell)、微微小区(pico cell)、毫微微小区(femto cell)等,这些小小区具有覆盖范围小、发射功率低的特点,适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。The network equipment provides services for the cell, and the terminal equipment communicates with the cell through the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) allocated by the network equipment. The cell can belong to a macro base station (for example, macro eNB or macro gNB, etc.), or to a base station corresponding to a small cell. The small cell here may include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell, femto cell, etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmission power, and are suitable for providing high-speed data transmission services.
下面对本申请实施例适用的网络架构进行举例描述。The following is an example description of a network architecture applicable to the embodiments of the present application.
请参阅图1,图1是本申请实施例提供的一种网络架构的示意图。如图1所示,该网络架构可以包括终端设备101、网络设备102和核心网设备103。其中,终端设备101可以通过无线方式与网络设备102相连,并可以通过网络设备102接入到核心网设备103中。终端设备101可以是固定位置的,也可以是可移动的。Please refer to Figure 1, which is a schematic diagram of a network architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 1, the network architecture may include a terminal device 101, a network device 102, and a core network device 103. Among them, the terminal device 101 can be connected to the network device 102 in a wireless manner, and can be connected to the core network device 103 through the network device 102. The terminal device 101 can be fixed or movable.
需要说明的是,图1所示的网络架构中所包含的网络设备、终端设备和核心网设备的数量和类型仅仅是一种举例,本申请实施例并不限制于此。例如,还可以包括更多的或者更少的与网络设备进行通信的终端设备,例如,还可以包括更多的或者更少的与网络设备进行通信的核心网设备。为简明描述,不在附图中一一描述。此外,在如图1所示的网络架构中,尽管示出了网络设备、终端设备和核心网设备,但是该应用场景中可以并不限于包括网络设备、终端设备和核心网设备,例如还可以包括用于承载虚拟化网络功能的设备等,这些对于本领域技术人员而言是显而易见的,在此不再一一赘述。It should be noted that the number and type of network devices, terminal devices, and core network devices included in the network architecture shown in Figure 1 are merely examples, and the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this. For example, more or fewer terminal devices that communicate with network devices may also be included, for example, more or fewer core network devices that communicate with network devices may also be included. For the sake of simplicity, they are not described one by one in the accompanying drawings. In addition, in the network architecture shown in Figure 1, although network devices, terminal devices, and core network devices are shown, the application scenario may not be limited to network devices, terminal devices, and core network devices. For example, devices for carrying virtualized network functions may also be included. These are obvious to those skilled in the art and will not be described one by one here.
进一步地,请参阅图2,图2是本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的网络架构示意图。如图2所示,网络设备也可以称为接入网设备,接入网设备可以包括基站gNB。接入网设备可以通过NG接口连接核心网设备,接入网设备之间可以通过Xn-C接口连接。其中,gNB可以采用CU-DU分离结构,CU和DU之间可以通过F1接口连接。如图3所示,CU包括无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)层和PDCP层,DU包括RLC层、媒体访问控制(medium access control,MAC)层和物理层(physical layer,PHY)。核心网设备可以包括接入和移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)网元和用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)网元。Further, please refer to Figure 2, which is a schematic diagram of the network architecture of a network device provided in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 2, the network device may also be referred to as an access network device, and the access network device may include a base station gNB. The access network device may be connected to the core network device through the NG interface, and the access network devices may be connected through the Xn-C interface. Among them, the gNB may adopt a CU-DU separation structure, and the CU and DU may be connected through the F1 interface. As shown in Figure 3, the CU includes a radio resource control (RRC) layer and a PDCP layer, and the DU includes an RLC layer, a medium access control (MAC) layer and a physical layer (PHY). The core network device may include an access and mobility management function (AMF) network element and a user plane function (UPF) network element.
gNB还可以包括有源天线单元(active antenna unit,AAU)。CU实现gNB的部分功能,DU实现gNB的部分功能。比如,CU负责处理非实时协议和服务。DU负责处理物理层协议 和实时服务。AAU实现部分物理层处理功能、射频处理及有源天线的相关功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息,或者,由PHY层的信息转变而来,因而,在这种架构下,高层信令,如RRC层信令,也可以认为是由DU发送的,或者,由DU和CU发送的。可以理解的是,网络设备可以为包括CU节点、DU节点、AAU节点中一项或多项的设备。此外,可以将CU划分为接入网(radio access network,RAN)中的网络设备,也可以将CU划分为核心网(core network,CN)中的网络设备,本申请对此不做限定。gNB can also include active antenna unit (AAU). CU implements some functions of gNB, and DU implements some functions of gNB. For example, CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services. DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services. AAU implements some physical layer processing functions, RF processing and related functions of active antennas. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or be converted from the information of the PHY layer, therefore, under this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by the DU, or by the DU and the CU. It can be understood that the network device can be a device including one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node. In addition, the CU can be divided into a network device in the access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into a network device in the core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
图4是适用于本申请实施例的一种双连接(dual-connectivity,DC)的场景示意图。双连接或多连接(Multi-Radio Dual Connectivity,MR-DC)指的是终端设备可以同时跟两个网络设备通信,两个网络设备可以一个是NR网络设备,一个是LTE网络设备,或者两个都是NR网络设备。一个网络设备为主站(master node,MN),一个网络设备为辅站(secondary node,SN)。如图4所示,当双连接与载波聚合(carrier aggregation,CA)结合时,每个网络设备下可以包括一个小区组(cell group,CG)。其中,MN下的小区组为主小区组(master cell group,MCG),SN下的小区组为辅小区组(secondary cell group,SCG)。主小区组中可以包括一个主小区(primary cell,PCell)和至少一个辅小区(secondar cell,SCell),辅小区组中可以包括一个主辅小区(primary secondar cell,PSCell)和至少一个辅小区(secondar cell,SCell)。FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a dual-connectivity (DC) scenario applicable to an embodiment of the present application. Dual-connectivity or multi-connectivity (Multi-Radio Dual Connectivity, MR-DC) means that a terminal device can communicate with two network devices at the same time, and one of the two network devices can be an NR network device and the other can be an LTE network device, or both can be NR network devices. One network device is a master node (MN), and one network device is a secondary node (SN). As shown in FIG4, when dual-connectivity is combined with carrier aggregation (CA), each network device can include a cell group (CG). Among them, the cell group under the MN is a master cell group (MCG), and the cell group under the SN is a secondary cell group (SCG). The primary cell group may include one primary cell (PCell) and at least one secondary cell (SCell), and the secondary cell group may include one primary secondary cell (PSCell) and at least one secondary cell (SCell).
应理解,当双连接没有与CA结合时,主站下只有一个主小区,辅站下只有一个主辅小区。该场景也适用于本申请实施例。It should be understood that when dual connectivity is not combined with CA, there is only one primary cell under the primary station and only one primary and secondary cell under the secondary station. This scenario is also applicable to the embodiments of the present application.
应理解,为了便于描述,图4中是以每个小区组中包括2个SCell为例进行说明的。It should be understood that for the sake of ease of description, FIG4 is illustrated by taking the example that each cell group includes 2 SCells.
在DC场景中,终端设备会存在执行PSCell的添加或变更过程。终端设备触发的PSCell的添加称为条件PSCell添加(conditional PSCell addition,CPA),终端设备触发的PSCell的变更称为条件PSCell变更(conditional PSCell change,CPC)。其中,CPA可以理解为PSCell的条件性添加,当终端设备满足PSCell的添加条件时,该终端设备执行PSCell的添加过程。CPC可以理解为PSCell的条件性变更,当终端设备满足PSCell的变更条件时,该终端设备执行PSCell的变更过程。具体的,作为示例,CPA以及CPC也可以统称为条件PSCell添加和变更(conditional PSCell addition/change,CPAC)。也即网络配置会配置多个候选PSCell,并向终端设备发送CPAC配置,该CPAC配置中包括有该多个候选PSCell的配置和对应的执行条件(execution condition)。当终端设备评估到某个候选PSCell的执行条件满足时,该终端设备可以执行PSCell的添加或变更过程。满足执行条件的小区可以称为选择的小区。In the DC scenario, the terminal device will have the process of adding or changing the PSCell. The addition of PSCell triggered by the terminal device is called conditional PSCell addition (CPA), and the change of PSCell triggered by the terminal device is called conditional PSCell change (CPC). Among them, CPA can be understood as the conditional addition of PSCell. When the terminal device meets the conditions for adding PSCell, the terminal device performs the process of adding PSCell. CPC can be understood as the conditional change of PSCell. When the terminal device meets the conditions for changing PSCell, the terminal device performs the process of changing PSCell. Specifically, as an example, CPA and CPC can also be collectively referred to as conditional PSCell addition and change (CPAC). That is, the network configuration will configure multiple candidate PSCells and send the CPAC configuration to the terminal device. The CPAC configuration includes the configuration of the multiple candidate PSCells and the corresponding execution conditions (execution condition). When the terminal device evaluates that the execution condition of a candidate PSCell is met, the terminal device can perform the process of adding or changing the PSCell. The cell that meets the execution condition can be called a selected cell.
上述终端设备在执行完上述CPA或CPC的过程,与满足条件的候选PSCell之间建立连接(例如,随机接入信道(random access channel,RACH))后,该终端设备会释放CPA配置和/或CPC配置。因此,在网络重配或者网络重新启动之前,该终端设备无法继续使用CPA配置和/或CPC配置。为了减少辅小区组变更的时延和信令开销,终端设备可以不释放CPA配置和/或CPC配置,在网络重配或者网络重新启动之前,该终端设继续使用之前存储的CPA配置或CPC配置,从而继续执行CPA或CPC的过程。After the terminal device completes the CPA or CPC process and establishes a connection with a candidate PSCell that meets the conditions (for example, a random access channel (RACH)), the terminal device will release the CPA configuration and/or CPC configuration. Therefore, before the network is reconfigured or the network is restarted, the terminal device cannot continue to use the CPA configuration and/or CPC configuration. In order to reduce the delay and signaling overhead of the secondary cell group change, the terminal device may not release the CPA configuration and/or CPC configuration. Before the network is reconfigured or the network is restarted, the terminal device continues to use the previously stored CPA configuration or CPC configuration, thereby continuing to execute the CPA or CPC process.
为了便于描述,本申请中可以将CPA或CPC统称为CPAC。将CPA配置或CPC配置统称为CPAC配置。For ease of description, CPA or CPC may be collectively referred to as CPAC in this application. CPA configuration or CPC configuration may be collectively referred to as CPAC configuration.
下面先给出本申请实施例可能出现的技术术语的定义。本申请的实施方式部分使用的术语仅用于对本申请的具体实施例进行解释,而非旨在限定本申请。The following is a definition of technical terms that may appear in the embodiments of the present application. The terms used in the implementation method section of the present application are only used to explain the specific embodiments of the present application, and are not intended to limit the present application.
(1)小区、源小区、目标小区、候选小区 (1) Cell, source cell, target cell, candidate cell
网络设备可以配置或部署或控制至少一个小区。The network device may configure or deploy or control at least one cell.
在切换场景中,终端设备切换前接入的小区称为源小区,终端设备切换后接入的小区称为目标小区。源小区和目标小区可能为同一个网络设备配置的小区,也可能是不同网络设备分别配置的小区。比如,网络设备为基站。一个示例为,源小区为基站1配置的小区11,目标小区为基站1配置的小区12。另一个示例为,源小区为基站1配置的小区11,目标小区为基站2配置的小区21。比如,在CU-DU分离架构中,网络设备包括CU和DU。一个示例为,源小区为DU1配置的小区11,目标小区为DU1配置的小区12。另一个示例为,源小区为DU1配置的小区11,目标小区为DU2配置的小区21。DU1和DU2可能属于同一个CU,也可能属于不同的CU。In the handover scenario, the cell accessed by the terminal device before the handover is called the source cell, and the cell accessed by the terminal device after the handover is called the target cell. The source cell and the target cell may be cells configured by the same network device, or they may be cells configured by different network devices. For example, the network device is a base station. One example is that the source cell is cell 11 configured by base station 1, and the target cell is cell 12 configured by base station 1. Another example is that the source cell is cell 11 configured by base station 1, and the target cell is cell 21 configured by base station 2. For example, in a CU-DU separation architecture, the network device includes a CU and a DU. One example is that the source cell is cell 11 configured by DU1, and the target cell is cell 12 configured by DU1. Another example is that the source cell is cell 11 configured by DU1, and the target cell is cell 21 configured by DU2. DU1 and DU2 may belong to the same CU or different CUs.
另一个示例中,终端可以执行PSCell的变更。在该示例中,主基站下的主小区可以不变。一个示例为,源小区为辅基站1配置的小区11,目标小区为辅基站1配置的小区12。另一个示例为,源小区为辅基站1配置的小区11,目标小区为辅基站2配置的小区21。In another example, the terminal may perform a change in the PSCell. In this example, the primary cell under the primary base station may remain unchanged. In one example, the source cell is cell 11 configured by secondary base station 1, and the target cell is cell 12 configured by secondary base station 1. In another example, the source cell is cell 11 configured by secondary base station 1, and the target cell is cell 21 configured by secondary base station 2.
候选小区也称为切换候选小区或目标候选小区或候选目标小区,本申请实施例对名称不作限定。在一些切换方式中,例如,后续介绍的L1/L2触发移动性(L1/L2-triggered mobility,LTM)或CPAC过程中,网络设备可以为终端设备配置至少一个候选小区。在这些切换方式中,目标小区为至少一个候选小区中的一个候选小区。The candidate cell is also referred to as a switching candidate cell or a target candidate cell or a candidate target cell, and the names are not limited in the embodiments of the present application. In some switching modes, for example, in the L1/L2-triggered mobility (LTM) or CPAC process described later, the network device can configure at least one candidate cell for the terminal device. In these switching modes, the target cell is a candidate cell among the at least one candidate cell.
(2)源网络设备、目标网络设备、候选网络设备(2) Source network device, target network device, candidate network device
在切换场景中,终端设备切换前通信的网络设备称为源网络设备,终端设备切换后通信的网络设备称为目标网络设备。In a switching scenario, the network device that the terminal device communicates with before switching is called the source network device, and the network device that the terminal device communicates with after switching is called the target network device.
源网络设备和目标网络设备可以相同,也可以不同。The source network device and the target network device can be the same or different.
源网络设备和目标网络设备相同时,称为网络设备内的切换。比如,网络设备为基站,源网络设备和目标网络设备均为基站1,源小区为基站1配置的小区11,目标小区为基站1配置的小区12,该切换为基站内切换。又比如,网络设备包括CU和DU。源网络设备和目标网络设备均为DU1,源小区为DU1配置的小区11,目标小区为DU1配置的小区12,该切换为DU内切换。再比如,网络设备为辅基站,源网络设备和目标网络设备均为辅基站1,源小区为辅基站1配置的小区11,目标小区为辅基站1配置的小区12,该切换为辅基站内切换。When the source network device and the target network device are the same, it is called a handover within the network device. For example, the network device is a base station, the source network device and the target network device are both base station 1, the source cell is cell 11 configured by base station 1, and the target cell is cell 12 configured by base station 1. The handover is a handover within the base station. For another example, the network device includes CU and DU. The source network device and the target network device are both DU1, the source cell is cell 11 configured by DU1, and the target cell is cell 12 configured by DU1. The handover is a handover within DU. For another example, the network device is an auxiliary base station, the source network device and the target network device are both auxiliary base station 1, the source cell is cell 11 configured by auxiliary base station 1, and the target cell is cell 12 configured by auxiliary base station 1. The handover is a handover within the auxiliary base station.
源网络设备和目标网络设备不同时,称为网络设备间切换或者不同网络设备之间的切换。比如,网络设备为基站,源小区为基站1配置的小区11,源网络设备为基站1,目标小区为基站2配置的小区21,目标网络设备为基站2,该切换为基站间切换。又比如,网络设备包括CU和DU。源小区为DU1配置的小区11,源网络设备为DU1,目标小区为DU2配置的小区21,目标网络设备为DU2,该切换为DU间切换。DU1和DU2可能属于同一个CU,也可能属于不同的CU。再比如,网络设备为辅基站,源小区为辅基站1配置的小区11,源网络设备为辅基站1,目标小区为辅基站2配置的小区21,目标网络设备为辅基站2,该切换为辅基站间切换。When the source network device and the target network device are different, it is called inter-network device handover or handover between different network devices. For example, the network device is a base station, the source cell is cell 11 configured by base station 1, the source network device is base station 1, the target cell is cell 21 configured by base station 2, and the target network device is base station 2. The handover is an inter-base station handover. For another example, the network device includes a CU and a DU. The source cell is cell 11 configured by DU1, the source network device is DU1, the target cell is cell 21 configured by DU2, and the target network device is DU2. The handover is an inter-DU handover. DU1 and DU2 may belong to the same CU or different CUs. For another example, the network device is a secondary base station, the source cell is cell 11 configured by secondary base station 1, the source network device is secondary base station 1, the target cell is cell 21 configured by secondary base station 2, and the target network device is secondary base station 2. The handover is an inter-secondary base station handover.
在一些切换方式中,例如,后续介绍的L1/L2触发移动性或CPAC,网络设备与至少一个候选网络设备通信,从而协商为终端设备配置的至少一个候选小区。在这些切换方式中,目标网络设备为至少一个候选网络设备中的一个候选网络设备。In some switching modes, such as L1/L2 triggered mobility or CPAC described later, the network device communicates with at least one candidate network device to negotiate at least one candidate cell configured for the terminal device. In these switching modes, the target network device is one of the at least one candidate network device.
(3)切换(3) Switch
在无线通信系统中,当终端设备从一个小区移动到另一个小区,或由于网络原因、业务负荷量调整、设备故障等原因,终端设备可能从源小区离开,接入到目标小区,以保障终端 设备与网络之间通信的连续性。上述过程即称为“切换”。In a wireless communication system, when a terminal device moves from one cell to another, or due to network reasons, business load adjustment, equipment failure, etc., the terminal device may leave the source cell and access the target cell to ensure the terminal The continuity of communication between the device and the network. The above process is called "handoff".
一种可能的实现方式,切换可以通过层3即RRC层来控制完成的。请参阅图5,图5是本申请实施例提供的一种切换的交互示意图。如图5所示,切换的流程可以如下:In a possible implementation, the switching can be controlled by layer 3, namely, the RRC layer. Please refer to FIG5 , which is a schematic diagram of a switching interaction provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG5 , the switching process can be as follows:
0.源基站对终端设备进行测量配置,终端设备根据测量配置执行测量,上报测量报告;0. The source base station performs measurement configuration on the terminal device, and the terminal device performs measurement according to the measurement configuration and reports the measurement report;
1.源基站进行切换判决(handover decision)。源基站进行切换判决可以参考终端设备上报的测量结果和/或自身切换算法。例如在源小区的信号质量较差,但是目标小区的信号质量较好的情况下,源基站确定执行切换;1. The source base station makes a handover decision. The source base station can refer to the measurement results reported by the terminal device and/or its own handover algorithm to make a handover decision. For example, when the signal quality of the source cell is poor, but the signal quality of the target cell is good, the source base station determines to perform a handover;
2.源基站向目标基站发送切换请求(handover request)消息。在该请求消息中传递必要的用于切换准备的相关信息,这些信息至少包括目标小区标识、密钥、终端在源小区的标识,基本的接入层配置等;2. The source base station sends a handover request message to the target base station. The request message transmits the necessary information for handover preparation, which at least includes the target cell ID, key, terminal ID in the source cell, basic access layer configuration, etc.
3.目标基站执行准入控制(admission control);3. The target base station performs admission control;
4.目标基站向源基站发送切换请求确认消息。如果目标基站确认终端设备可以接入,则向源小区回复切换请求确认消息,其中向终端设备发送的切换命令可以以RRC容器(container)的方式包含在确认消息中;4. The target base station sends a handover request confirmation message to the source base station. If the target base station confirms that the terminal device can access, it replies with a handover request confirmation message to the source cell, where the handover command sent to the terminal device can be included in the confirmation message in the form of an RRC container;
5.源基站向终端设备发送RRC重配消息(或者切换命令)。该消息中包含了接入目标小区需要的信息,至少包括目标小区标识、新的终端设备标识、目标小区的安全算法标识,还有可能携带接入目标小区的专用RACH资源等;5. The source base station sends an RRC reconfiguration message (or handover command) to the terminal device. The message contains the information required to access the target cell, including at least the target cell identifier, the new terminal device identifier, the target cell security algorithm identifier, and may also carry the dedicated RACH resources for accessing the target cell;
6.终端设备收到切换命令之后,执行与目标小区之间的同步,例如通过随机接入过程(RACH)实现;6. After receiving the handover command, the terminal device performs synchronization with the target cell, for example, through a random access procedure (RACH);
7.终端设备向目标基站发送RRC重配完成消息,该消息用于确认成功完成RRC重配置。RRC重配完成消息中包括目标基站在终端设备接入后配置终端设备所需要的信息,能帮助目标基站更好地配置终端设备的资源或测量。7. The terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the target base station, which is used to confirm the successful completion of the RRC reconfiguration. The RRC reconfiguration complete message includes the information required by the target base station to configure the terminal device after the terminal device accesses, which can help the target base station better configure the resources or measurements of the terminal device.
其中,RRC重配完成消息中包括的主要内容可以如表1所示。表1中的信元或字段是RRC重配完成消息中目前包含的信元或字段,未来还可能引入新的字段,本申请不做限定。The main contents included in the RRC reconfiguration complete message may be shown in Table 1. The information elements or fields in Table 1 are the information elements or fields currently included in the RRC reconfiguration complete message, and new fields may be introduced in the future, which is not limited in this application.
表1

Table 1

其中,RRC处理标识是必须携带的,除RRC处理标识外的其他信元或字段是可选携带的。由上表可以看出,RRC重配完成消息中的部分参数的比特大小很大。可以理解的是,上表中的比特大小值为举例,不一定为精确的值。Among them, the RRC processing identifier must be carried, and other information elements or fields except the RRC processing identifier are optional. As can be seen from the above table, the bit size of some parameters in the RRC reconfiguration complete message is very large. It can be understood that the bit size values in the above table are for example only and are not necessarily accurate values.
(4)L1/L2触发移动性(4) L1/L2 triggered mobility
一种可能的实现方式,切换可以通过L1/L2触发移动性来完成。L1/L2触发移动性也可以称为L1/L2切换,L1/L2移动性,低层(lower layer)切换,低层移动性或L2触发移动性等,本申请实施例对名称不作限定。针对数据量较大的场景(例如扩展现实(extend reality,XR)业务)或切换较为频繁的场景(例如频率范围2(frequency range,FR2)),为了降低切换时延和中断时间,提高终端的用户体验,提出层1/层2移动性。L1/L2触发移动性是通过L1信令或L2信令来指示终端执行切换。其中,L1信令可以是下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI),L2信令可以是MAC控制元素(Media Access Control control element,MAC CE)。L1/L2触发移动性的主要思想为:网络设备基于终端设备上报的测量报告选择一个或多个候选小区配置,这里的测量报告可以是层3(L3)测量报告,并通过预配置信息(可以包含在RRC重配消息中)向终端设备提供一个或多个候选小区的配置信息。终端设备在接收到L1/L2触发移动性的配置信息后,并不马上执行切换。源网络设备基于终端设备上报的测量报告(例如L1测量报告)确定触发L1/L2触发移动性。源网络设备通过L1/L2信令向终端设备发送L1/L2触发移动性小区变更(cell switch)命令,其中指示了终端设备切换的目标小区标识或目标小区配置,可选的还可以包括目标小区的目标波束信息。L1/L2触发移动性小区变更命令也可以称为L1/L2切换命令,或者L1/L2触发移动性命令,或者L1/L2触发移动性MAC CE/DCI。终端设备基于小区变更命令中的指示执行切换过程。L1/L2触发移动性可以限制在同一CU内。关于L1/L2触发移动性的实现包括多种技术方案,以下示例性的列举如下几种,其中:In one possible implementation, switching can be accomplished by L1/L2 triggered mobility. L1/L2 triggered mobility may also be referred to as L1/L2 switching, L1/L2 mobility, lower layer switching, lower layer mobility or L2 triggered mobility, etc., and the names are not limited in the embodiments of the present application. For scenarios with large amounts of data (such as extended reality (XR) services) or scenarios with frequent switching (such as frequency range 2 (FR2)), in order to reduce switching delays and interruption times and improve the user experience of the terminal, layer 1/layer 2 mobility is proposed. L1/L2 triggered mobility is to instruct the terminal to perform switching through L1 signaling or L2 signaling. Among them, L1 signaling can be downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI), and L2 signaling can be MAC control element (Media Access Control control element, MAC CE). The main idea of L1/L2 triggered mobility is that the network device selects one or more candidate cell configurations based on the measurement report reported by the terminal device, where the measurement report can be a layer 3 (L3) measurement report, and provides the terminal device with the configuration information of one or more candidate cells through pre-configuration information (which can be included in the RRC reconfiguration message). After receiving the configuration information of L1/L2 triggered mobility, the terminal device does not immediately perform the handover. The source network device determines to trigger L1/L2 triggered mobility based on the measurement report (such as L1 measurement report) reported by the terminal device. The source network device sends an L1/L2 triggered mobility cell change (cell switch) command to the terminal device through L1/L2 signaling, which indicates the target cell identity or target cell configuration of the terminal device switching, and optionally includes the target beam information of the target cell. The L1/L2 triggered mobility cell change command can also be called an L1/L2 switching command, or an L1/L2 triggered mobility command, or an L1/L2 triggered mobility MAC CE/DCI. The terminal device performs the handover process based on the instructions in the cell change command. L1/L2 triggered mobility can be limited to the same CU. There are many technical solutions for implementing L1/L2 triggered mobility, and several of them are listed below as examples:
方案一:CU内DU间(intra-CU inter-DU)的L1/L2触发移动性。Solution 1: L1/L2 triggered mobility between DUs within a CU (intra-CU inter-DU).
请参阅图6,图6是本申请实施例提供的一种CU内DU间L1/L2触发移动性的交互示意图。如图6所示,CU内DU间L1/L2触发移动性的流程包括:Please refer to Figure 6, which is a schematic diagram of an interaction of L1/L2 triggered mobility between DUs in a CU provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 6, the process of L1/L2 triggered mobility between DUs in a CU includes:
0.终端设备根据测量配置执行测量,并上报测量报告;该测量配置和报告可以为L3测量配置和报告,可以是由CU配置的; 0. The terminal device performs measurement according to the measurement configuration and reports a measurement report; the measurement configuration and report may be an L3 measurement configuration and report, and may be configured by the CU;
1.基站(例如CU)确定L1/L2触发移动性配置决定(或切换准备决定)。基站确定要执行L1/L2触发移动性,并确定L1/L2触发移动性的候选小区。基站确定配置决定或候选小区可以参考终端设备的上报结果和/或自身切换算法;1. The base station (e.g., CU) determines the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration decision (or handover preparation decision). The base station determines to perform L1/L2 triggered mobility and determines the candidate cells for L1/L2 triggered mobility. The base station determines the configuration decision or candidate cells by referring to the reporting results of the terminal device and/or its own handover algorithm;
2.CU向多个候选DU发送终端设备上下文建立请求消息。多个候选DU可以是多个候选小区所属的DU;2. The CU sends a terminal device context establishment request message to multiple candidate DUs. The multiple candidate DUs may be DUs to which multiple candidate cells belong;
3.候选DU向CU发送终端设备上下文建立请求确认消息。如果候选DU确认终端设备可以连接,则向CU回复终端设备上下文建立请求确认消息,其中可以包括候选小区的配置信息;3. The candidate DU sends a terminal device context establishment request confirmation message to the CU. If the candidate DU confirms that the terminal device can be connected, it replies to the CU with a terminal device context establishment request confirmation message, which may include the configuration information of the candidate cell;
4.基站(例如CU)向终端设备发送RRC重配消息,其中包含了L1/L2触发移动性预配置信息,L1/L2触发移动性预配置信息中包含了一个或多个候选小区的配置信息。可选的,该RRC重配消息中还可以包括源小区的配置信息。其中,每个候选小区的配置信息可以以下方式中的一种发送:4. The base station (e.g., CU) sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the terminal device, which includes L1/L2 triggered mobility preconfiguration information, and the L1/L2 triggered mobility preconfiguration information includes configuration information of one or more candidate cells. Optionally, the RRC reconfiguration message may also include configuration information of the source cell. The configuration information of each candidate cell may be sent in one of the following ways:
a)每个候选小区的配置信息包含在一个RRC重配消息中。即第4步中基站向终端设备发送的RRC重配消息中包含了一个或多个RRC重配消息,分别包含了一个或多个候选小区的配置信息;a) The configuration information of each candidate cell is included in an RRC reconfiguration message. That is, the RRC reconfiguration message sent by the base station to the terminal device in step 4 includes one or more RRC reconfiguration messages, each of which includes the configuration information of one or more candidate cells;
b)每个候选小区的配置信息包含在一个信元(Information element,IE)中。即第四步中基站向终端设备发送的RRC重配消息中包含了一个或多个IE,分别包含了一个或多个候选小区的配置信息。例如该IE可以为小区组配置(CellGroupConfig)IE。b) The configuration information of each candidate cell is contained in an information element (IE). That is, the RRC reconfiguration message sent by the base station to the terminal device in the fourth step contains one or more IEs, each containing the configuration information of one or more candidate cells. For example, the IE can be a cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig) IE.
5.终端设备收到RRC重配消息后,终端设备向基站发送RRC重配完成消息。该RRC重配完成消息用于确认第4步中基站发送的RRC重配过程;5. After receiving the RRC reconfiguration message, the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration completion message to the base station. The RRC reconfiguration completion message is used to confirm the RRC reconfiguration process sent by the base station in step 4;
6.终端设备基于L1测量配置执行L1测量并发送L1测量报告。其中L1测量配置可以包含在第4步中的RRC重配消息中。6. The terminal device performs L1 measurement based on the L1 measurement configuration and sends an L1 measurement report. The L1 measurement configuration may be included in the RRC reconfiguration message in step 4.
7.基站(例如源DU)基于终端设备发送的L1测量报告确定触发L1/L2触发移动性;7. The base station (e.g., source DU) determines to trigger L1/L2 triggered mobility based on the L1 measurement report sent by the terminal device;
8.基站向终端设备发送L1/L2触发移动性小区变更命令。其中,该小区变更命令可以承载在MAC CE或DCI上。该小区变更命令中指示了终端设备切换的目标小区标识,或者指示了终端设备切换的目标小区配置标识。目标小区包含在上述候选小区中。8. The base station sends an L1/L2 triggered mobility cell change command to the terminal device. The cell change command can be carried on MAC CE or DCI. The cell change command indicates the target cell identifier of the terminal device switching, or indicates the target cell configuration identifier of the terminal device switching. The target cell is included in the above-mentioned candidate cells.
9.终端设备接入目标小区。终端设备可以向目标小区所属的基站(例如目标DU)执行同步。该同步过程可以通过RACH过程实现,或通过其他过程(例如RACH-less)实现;9. The terminal device accesses the target cell. The terminal device may perform synchronization with the base station (e.g., target DU) to which the target cell belongs. The synchronization process may be implemented through the RACH process, or through other processes (e.g., RACH-less);
10.如果第4步中每个候选小区的配置信息包含在一个RRC重配完成消息中,那么终端设备向基站发送RRC重配完成消息。10. If the configuration information of each candidate cell in step 4 is included in an RRC reconfiguration complete message, the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the base station.
方案二:CU内DU内(intra-CU intra-DU)的L1/L2触发移动性。Solution 2: L1/L2 triggered mobility within CU and DU (intra-CU intra-DU).
请参阅图7,图7是本申请实施例提供的一种CU内DU内L1/L2触发移动性的交互示意图。如图7所示,CU内DU内L1/L2触发移动性的流程包括:Please refer to Figure 7, which is a schematic diagram of an interaction of intra-CU intra-DU L1/L2 triggered mobility provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 7, the process of intra-CU intra-DU L1/L2 triggered mobility includes:
0.终端设备根据测量配置执行测量,并上报测量报告;该测量配置和报告可以为L3测量配置和报告,可以是由CU配置的;0. The terminal device performs measurement according to the measurement configuration and reports a measurement report; the measurement configuration and report may be an L3 measurement configuration and report, and may be configured by the CU;
1.基站(例如CU)确定L1/L2触发移动性配置决定(或切换准备决定)。基站确定要执行L1/L2触发移动性,并确定L1/L2触发移动性的候选小区。基站确定配置决定或候选小区可以参考终端设备的上报结果和/或自身切换算法;1. The base station (e.g., CU) determines the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration decision (or handover preparation decision). The base station determines to perform L1/L2 triggered mobility and determines the candidate cells for L1/L2 triggered mobility. The base station determines the configuration decision or candidate cells by referring to the reporting results of the terminal device and/or its own handover algorithm;
2.CU向多个候选DU发送终端设备上下文建立请求消息。多个候选DU可以是多个候选小区所属的DU;2. The CU sends a terminal device context establishment request message to multiple candidate DUs. The multiple candidate DUs may be DUs to which multiple candidate cells belong;
3.候选DU向CU发送终端设备上下文建立请求确认消息。如果候选DU确认终端设备可 以连接,则向CU回复终端设备上下文建立请求确认消息,其中可以包括候选小区的配置信息;3. The candidate DU sends a terminal device context establishment request confirmation message to the CU. If the candidate DU confirms that the terminal device can If the cell is connected, the CU is replied with a terminal device context establishment request confirmation message, which may include the configuration information of the candidate cell;
4.基站(例如CU)向终端设备发送RRC重配消息,其中包含了L1/L2触发移动性预配置信息。L1/L2触发移动性预配置信息中包含了一个或多个候选小区的配置信息。可选的,该RRC重配消息中还可以包括源小区的配置信息。其中,每个候选小区的配置信息可以以下方式中的一种发送:4. The base station (e.g., CU) sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the terminal device, which includes L1/L2 triggered mobility preconfiguration information. The L1/L2 triggered mobility preconfiguration information includes configuration information of one or more candidate cells. Optionally, the RRC reconfiguration message may also include configuration information of the source cell. The configuration information of each candidate cell may be sent in one of the following ways:
a)每个候选小区的配置信息包含在一个RRC重配消息中。即第4步中基站向终端设备发送的RRC重配消息中包含了一个或多个RRC重配消息,分别包含了一个或多个候选小区的配置信息;a) The configuration information of each candidate cell is included in an RRC reconfiguration message. That is, the RRC reconfiguration message sent by the base station to the terminal device in step 4 includes one or more RRC reconfiguration messages, each of which includes the configuration information of one or more candidate cells;
b)每个候选小区的配置信息包含在一个IE中。即第四步中基站向终端设备发送的RRC重配消息中包含了一个或多个IE,分别包含了一个或多个候选小区的配置信息。例如该IE可以为小区组配置IE。b) The configuration information of each candidate cell is included in an IE. That is, the RRC reconfiguration message sent by the base station to the terminal device in the fourth step includes one or more IEs, each including the configuration information of one or more candidate cells. For example, the IE may be a cell group configuration IE.
5.终端设备收到RRC重配消息后,终端设备向基站发送RRC重配完成消息。该RRC重配完成消息用于确认第4步中基站发送的RRC重配过程;5. After receiving the RRC reconfiguration message, the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration completion message to the base station. The RRC reconfiguration completion message is used to confirm the RRC reconfiguration process sent by the base station in step 4;
6.终端设备基于L1测量配置执行L1测量并发送L1测量报告。其中L1测量配置可以包含在第4步中的RRC重配消息中。6. The terminal device performs L1 measurement based on the L1 measurement configuration and sends an L1 measurement report. The L1 measurement configuration may be included in the RRC reconfiguration message in step 4.
7.基站(例如DU)基于终端设备发送的L1测量报告确定触发L1/L2触发移动性;7. The base station (e.g., DU) determines to trigger L1/L2 triggered mobility based on the L1 measurement report sent by the terminal device;
8.基站向终端设备发送L1/L2触发移动性小区变更命令。其中,该小区变更命令可以承载在MAC CE或DCI上。该小区变更命令中指示了终端设备切换的目标小区标识,或者指示了终端设备切换的目标小区配置标识。目标小区包含在上述候选小区中;8. The base station sends an L1/L2 triggered mobility cell change command to the terminal device. The cell change command can be carried on MAC CE or DCI. The cell change command indicates the target cell identifier of the terminal device switching, or indicates the target cell configuration identifier of the terminal device switching. The target cell is included in the above-mentioned candidate cells;
9.终端设备接入目标小区。终端设备可以向基站(例如DU)执行同步。该同步过程可以通过RACH过程实现,或通过其他过程(例如RACH-less)实现;9. The terminal device accesses the target cell. The terminal device may perform synchronization to the base station (e.g., DU). The synchronization process may be implemented through the RACH process, or through other processes (e.g., RACH-less);
10.如果第4步中每个候选小区的配置信息包含在一个RRC重配完成消息中,那么终端设备向基站发送RRC重配完成消息。10. If the configuration information of each candidate cell in step 4 is included in an RRC reconfiguration complete message, the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the base station.
(5)CPAC(5)CPAC
CPAC指的是CPA和/或CPC过程。CPA和CPC分别是DC场景中PSCell的添加和变更。其主要思想是:网络设备(例如主基站)配置多个候选PSCell小区,且每个候选PSCell小区配置均包括有该小区的配置和关联的执行条件。当某个候选小区关联的执行条件满足时,终端设备可以执行向该候选小区的PSCell的添加或变更。CPAC refers to the CPA and/or CPC process. CPA and CPC are the addition and change of PSCell in DC scenario respectively. The main idea is that the network equipment (such as the main base station) configures multiple candidate PSCell cells, and each candidate PSCell cell configuration includes the configuration of the cell and the associated execution conditions. When the execution conditions associated with a candidate cell are met, the terminal device can perform the addition or change of the PSCell to the candidate cell.
CPA过程是当满足PSCell添加条件时,执行PSCell添加过程。以MR-DC场景下,如图8所示,MN触发的CPA为例流程如下:The CPA process is to perform the PSCell addition process when the PSCell addition conditions are met. Taking the MR-DC scenario, as shown in Figure 8, the CPA triggered by the MN is as follows:
1.MN向候选小区所在的SN发送辅站添加请求;1. The MN sends a request to add a secondary station to the SN where the candidate cell is located;
2.候选小区所在的SN向MN发送辅站添加请求确认;2. The SN where the candidate cell is located sends a secondary station addition request confirmation to the MN;
3.MN通过RRC重配消息向终端设备发送CPA配置。其中包括来自各个SN的候选小区的配置信息和相关的执行条件;3. The MN sends the CPA configuration to the terminal device via the RRC reconfiguration message, which includes the configuration information of the candidate cells from each SN and the related execution conditions;
4.终端设备接收到MN的RRC重配消息后,向MN发送RRC重配完成消息。终端设备使用除CPA外的RRC重配消息中的其他RRC配置;4. After receiving the RRC reconfiguration message from the MN, the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the MN. The terminal device uses other RRC configurations in the RRC reconfiguration message except the CPA;
4a.终端设备开始评估执行条件,如果一个候选小区的执行条件被满足,则终端设备使用RRC重配消息中选择的候选小区的配置(也即满足执行条件的候选小区),并向MN发送RRC重配完成消息(包括SN重配完成消息);4a. The terminal device starts to evaluate the execution conditions. If the execution conditions of a candidate cell are met, the terminal device uses the configuration of the candidate cell selected in the RRC reconfiguration message (ie, the candidate cell that meets the execution conditions) and sends an RRC reconfiguration completion message (including an SN reconfiguration completion message) to the MN;
5.MN告知SN完成重配过程; 5.MN informs SN to complete the reconfiguration process;
6.终端设备接入目标小区(上述选择的候选小区/满足执行条件的候选小区),例如执行RACH过程;6. The terminal device accesses the target cell (the candidate cell selected above/the candidate cell that meets the execution conditions), for example, performs a RACH process;
7.MN向目标SN发送SN状态转移(SN Status Transfer);7.MN sends SN Status Transfer to the target SN;
8.MN向目标SN执行数据转发8.MN forwards data to the target SN
9~12.执行路径转换过程。9~12. Execute the path conversion process.
CPC过程是当满足PSCell变更条件时,执行PSCell变更过程。以MR-DC场景下,如图9所示,MN触发的CPC流程为例:The CPC process is to execute the PSCell change process when the PSCell change conditions are met. Take the CPC process triggered by the MN in the MR-DC scenario as an example, as shown in Figure 9:
1.MN向候选小区所在的SN发送辅站添加请求;1. The MN sends a request to add a secondary station to the SN where the candidate cell is located;
2.候选小区所在的SN向MN发送辅站添加请求确认;2. The SN where the candidate cell is located sends a secondary station addition request confirmation to the MN;
3.MN通过RRC重配消息向终端设备发送CPC配置。其中包括来自各个SN的候选小区的配置信息和相关的执行条件;3. The MN sends CPC configuration to the terminal device via RRC reconfiguration message, which includes configuration information of candidate cells from each SN and related execution conditions;
4.终端设备接收到MN的RRC重配消息后,向MN发送RRC重配完成消息。终端设备使用除CPC外的RRC重配消息中的其他RRC配置;4. After receiving the RRC reconfiguration message from the MN, the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the MN. The terminal device uses other RRC configurations in the RRC reconfiguration message except the CPC;
4a.MN通过Xn-U地址指示(address indication)告知SN已经触发了CPC;4a.MN informs SN that CPC has been triggered through Xn-U address indication;
5.终端设备开始评估执行条件,如果一个候选小区的执行条件被满足,则终端设备使用RRC重配消息中选择的候选小区(也即满足执行条件的候选小区)的配置,向MN发送RRC重配完成消息(包括SN重配完成消息);5. The terminal device starts to evaluate the execution conditions. If the execution conditions of a candidate cell are met, the terminal device uses the configuration of the candidate cell selected in the RRC reconfiguration message (that is, the candidate cell that meets the execution conditions) and sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message (including an SN reconfiguration complete message) to the MN;
6.MN告知源SN停止与终端设备的数据传输;6.MN informs the source SN to stop data transmission with the terminal device;
7.MN告知目标SN完成重配过程;7.MN informs the target SN to complete the reconfiguration process;
8.终端设备接入目标小区(上述选择的候选小区/满足执行条件的候选小区),例如执行RACH过程;8. The terminal device accesses the target cell (the candidate cell selected above/the candidate cell that meets the execution conditions), for example, performs a RACH process;
9.源SN通过MN向目标SN发送SN状态转移;9. The source SN sends an SN state transfer to the target SN via the MN;
10.MN向目标SN执行数据转发。10. The MN forwards data to the target SN.
11~17.执行路径转换过程。11~17. Execute the path conversion process.
(6)连续L1/L2触发移动性(6) Continuous L1/L2 Triggered Mobility
连续(consecutive或subsequent)L1/L2触发移动性的主要思想是:终端设备在执行完一次L1/L2触发移动性后,并不释放L1/L2触发移动性配置信息,而是继续维护L1/L2触发移动性配置信息。基站(例如终端设备的服务DU)可以基于终端设备上报的测量报告确定L1/L2触发移动性小区变更命令,终端设备基于小区变更命令指示的目标小区,使用维护的L1/L2触发移动性配置信息执行后续的L1/L2触发移动性。即L1/L2触发移动性可以连续执行多次。The main idea of consecutive (or subsequent) L1/L2 triggered mobility is that after executing L1/L2 triggered mobility once, the terminal device does not release the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration information, but continues to maintain the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration information. The base station (such as the service DU of the terminal device) can determine the L1/L2 triggered mobility cell change command based on the measurement report reported by the terminal device, and the terminal device uses the maintained L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration information to execute subsequent L1/L2 triggered mobility based on the target cell indicated by the cell change command. That is, L1/L2 triggered mobility can be executed multiple times in succession.
连续L1/L2触发移动性也可以称为后续L1/L2触发移动性等。以连续执行两次inter-DU L1/L2触发移动性为例,其流程如图10所示:Continuous L1/L2 triggered mobility can also be called subsequent L1/L2 triggered mobility, etc. Taking the execution of two consecutive inter-DU L1/L2 triggered mobility as an example, the process is shown in Figure 10:
步骤0~步骤10:与图6过程相同,为终端设备执行第一次L1/L2触发移动性的过程。Step 0 to Step 10: The same as the process in FIG. 6 , the first L1/L2 triggered mobility process is performed for the terminal device.
11.在完成第一次L1/L2触发移动性后,目标DU可以向CU指示切换完成。其中接入成功(ACCESS SUCCESS)消息中可以指示终端设备切换到的目标小区的标识;11. After completing the first L1/L2 triggered mobility, the target DU can indicate the handover completion to the CU. The ACCESS SUCCESS message can indicate the identifier of the target cell to which the terminal device is switching;
12.终端设备继续执行L1测量并上报L1测量结果,测量结果上报基站。例如终端设备将测量结果上报给终端设备执行完第一次L1/L2触发移动性后的目标DU,此时目标DU成为了终端设备此时连接的DU;12. The terminal device continues to perform L1 measurement and reports the L1 measurement result, and the measurement result is reported to the base station. For example, the terminal device reports the measurement result to the target DU after the terminal device performs the first L1/L2 triggered mobility. At this time, the target DU becomes the DU connected to the terminal device at this time;
13.终端设备所在的DU基于终端设备上报的测量报告确定触发L1/L2触发移动性,并确定此次切换的目标小区;13. The DU where the terminal device is located determines the triggering of L1/L2 triggered mobility based on the measurement report reported by the terminal device, and determines the target cell for this handover;
14.终端设备所在的DU向终端设备发送L1/L2触发移动性小区变更命令,其中包含了终 端设备此次切换的目标小区标识或目标小区配置标识。该目标小区也包含在之前配置的候选小区中。例如,此次切换的目标小区为之前的源小区,或与之前的源小区属于同一DU的其他候选小区;14. The DU where the terminal device is located sends an L1/L2 triggered mobility cell change command to the terminal device, which includes the terminal The target cell identifier or target cell configuration identifier of the handover of the terminal device. The target cell is also included in the previously configured candidate cells. For example, the target cell of this handover is the previous source cell, or another candidate cell belonging to the same DU as the previous source cell;
15.终端设备接入此次切换的目标小区。终端设备可以向此次切换的目标DU执行同步。该同步过程可以通过RACH过程实现,或通过其他过程(例如RACH-less)实现;15. The terminal device accesses the target cell of this handover. The terminal device can perform synchronization to the target DU of this handover. The synchronization process can be implemented through the RACH process, or through other processes (such as RACH-less);
16.如果第4步中每个候选小区的配置信息包含在一个RRC重配完成消息中,那么终端设备向目标小区发送RRC重配完成消息。16. If the configuration information of each candidate cell in step 4 is included in an RRC reconfiguration complete message, the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the target cell.
上述步骤11~步骤16可以重复多次。终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示释放L1/L2触发移动性的配置,或者自行释放L1/L2触发移动性的配置,例如执行切换的次数达到阈值,或接收到配置的时长达到阈值等。The above steps 11 to 16 can be repeated multiple times. The terminal device can release the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration based on the instruction of the network device, or release the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration by itself, for example, the number of handovers reaches a threshold, or the duration of receiving the configuration reaches a threshold.
(7)连续CPAC(7) Continuous CPAC
在CPAC中,完成与目标小区之间的RACH过程之后,终端设备会释放CPA/CPC配置。因此在网络重配或者网络重新启动之前,终端设备无法使用CPAC配置。为了减少SCG切换的时延和信令开销,连续CPAC(subsequent CPAC)或者选择性激活小区组过程允许SCG切换之后,网络重配之前继续执行CPAC。In CPAC, after completing the RACH process with the target cell, the terminal device releases the CPA/CPC configuration. Therefore, the terminal device cannot use the CPAC configuration before the network is reconfigured or restarted. In order to reduce the latency and signaling overhead of SCG switching, subsequent CPAC or the selective activation of cell groups process allows CPAC to continue after SCG switching and before network reconfiguration.
以连续CPC为例,其场景如图11所示:Taking continuous CPC as an example, the scenario is shown in Figure 11:
1.终端设备与MN以及SN下的小区3通信(可能还有其他SCell),即小区3为终端设备此时的PSCell小区;1. The terminal device communicates with the MN and cell 3 under the SN (there may be other SCells), that is, cell 3 is the PSCell cell of the terminal device at this time;
2.此时网络为终端设备配置了CPC配置,其中候选小区包括小区{1,2,…,9},CPC配置中还可以包括每个候选小区的配置以及执行条件;2. At this time, the network configures the CPC configuration for the terminal device, where the candidate cells include cells {1, 2, ..., 9}. The CPC configuration may also include the configuration and execution conditions of each candidate cell;
3.终端设备检测到小区5的执行条件被满足,则终端设备将PSCell小区变更为小区5。终端设备在完成与小区5的连接后,并不释放CPC配置,而是继续维护CPC配置,并执行CPC过程。3. When the terminal device detects that the execution condition of cell 5 is met, the terminal device changes the PSCell cell to cell 5. After completing the connection with cell 5, the terminal device does not release the CPC configuration, but continues to maintain the CPC configuration and execute the CPC process.
4.终端设备可以继续评估其他候选小区,当有其他候选小区满足执行条件时,终端设备应触发PSCell变更过程。例如图11中,终端设备后续又检测到小区3满足执行条件,因此终端设备又将PSCell小区切换为小区3。4. The terminal device can continue to evaluate other candidate cells. When other candidate cells meet the execution conditions, the terminal device should trigger the PSCell change process. For example, in Figure 11, the terminal device subsequently detects that cell 3 meets the execution conditions, so the terminal device switches the PSCell cell to cell 3.
以连续两次CPC为例,其流程可以如图12所示:Taking two consecutive CPCs as an example, the process can be shown in Figure 12:
步骤1~步骤8:与图9所示过程相同,为第一次执行CPC的过程;Step 1 to Step 8: The same as the process shown in FIG9 , which is the process of executing CPC for the first time;
9.终端设备切换到新的SN后,继续执行候选小区的评估;9. After the terminal device switches to the new SN, it continues to evaluate the candidate cells;
10.若终端设备评估到满足执行条件的候选小区,则终端设备向MN发送RRC重配完成消息,该消息中可以指示终端设备选择的目标候选小区;10. If the terminal device evaluates a candidate cell that meets the execution conditions, the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration completion message to the MN, which may indicate the target candidate cell selected by the terminal device;
11.MN向候选小区所属的SN转发SN的重配消息;11. The MN forwards the SN reconfiguration message to the SN to which the candidate cell belongs;
12.终端设备执行与选择的候选小区之间的同步。12. The terminal device performs synchronization with the selected candidate cell.
上述步骤9~步骤12可以重复多次。终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示释放CPAC的配置,或者自行释放CPAC的配置,例如执行切换的次数达到阈值,或接收到配置的时长达到阈值等。The above steps 9 to 12 can be repeated multiple times. The terminal device can release the CPAC configuration based on the instruction of the network device, or release the CPAC configuration by itself, for example, when the number of switching executions reaches a threshold, or the time length of receiving the configuration reaches a threshold.
在L1/L2触发移动性中,若在步骤4(例如图6或图7)中基站(例如CU)发送给终端设备的L1/L2触发移动性配置信息中,每个候选小区的配置不是通过RRC重配消息发送的,那么当触发向候选小区的L1/L2触发移动性时,终端设备无法向候选小区响应RRC重配完成消息。也就是说,在步骤10中终端设备将不会向目标小区发送RRC重配完成消息,从而导 致候选小区所无法获取RRC重配完成消息中的信息,例如,终端设备的资源或测量参数,可能导致终端设备接入候选小区后配置不当或无法进行正常数据传输的问题。In L1/L2 triggered mobility, if in step 4 (e.g., FIG. 6 or FIG. 7 ) the configuration of each candidate cell in the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration information sent by the base station (e.g., CU) to the terminal device is not sent via an RRC reconfiguration message, then when the L1/L2 triggered mobility to the candidate cell is triggered, the terminal device cannot respond to the RRC reconfiguration completion message to the candidate cell. That is, in step 10, the terminal device will not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message to the target cell, resulting in The candidate cell is unable to obtain information in the RRC reconfiguration completion message, such as resources or measurement parameters of the terminal device, which may cause the terminal device to be improperly configured or unable to perform normal data transmission after accessing the candidate cell.
例如,若候选小区无法获知表1中的上行直流参数,则候选小区无法在为终端设备提供配置时避开上行零频点,若终端设备在该频点上发送数据,可能造成数据丢失。再例如,若候选小区无法获知表1中的是否需要测量间隙指示,则候选小区在为终端设备提供配置时,则无法确定是否为终端设备配置测量间隙,影响对终端设备的调度,从而影响数据传输。若后续在RRC重配完成消息中引入了其他功能的信元,候选小区也无法获知该信息,造成其他的影响。For example, if the candidate cell cannot obtain the uplink DC parameters in Table 1, the candidate cell cannot avoid the uplink zero frequency point when providing configuration for the terminal device. If the terminal device sends data at this frequency point, data loss may occur. For another example, if the candidate cell cannot obtain the indication of whether a measurement gap is required in Table 1, the candidate cell cannot determine whether to configure a measurement gap for the terminal device when providing configuration for the terminal device, which affects the scheduling of the terminal device and thus affects data transmission. If other function information elements are subsequently introduced in the RRC reconfiguration completion message, the candidate cell will not be able to obtain this information, resulting in other impacts.
为了解决上述问题,本申请实施例提供一种切换方法,用于切换场景下候选小区能更好的获取终端设备发送的RRC重配完成消息中的信息,便于终端设备接入候选小区后能正常配置和数据传输。In order to solve the above problems, an embodiment of the present application provides a switching method, which is used for the candidate cell in the switching scenario to better obtain the information in the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent by the terminal device, so as to facilitate the normal configuration and data transmission of the terminal device after accessing the candidate cell.
图13是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的一例示意图。该方法可以由终端设备和网络设备执行,或者也可以由终端设备中的芯片和网络设备中的芯片执行。应理解,图13示出了该通信方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其他操作或者图13中的各个操作的变形,或者是合理的步骤间的调换。FIG13 is a schematic diagram of an example of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application. The method can be performed by a terminal device and a network device, or can also be performed by a chip in a terminal device and a chip in a network device. It should be understood that FIG13 shows the steps or operations of the communication method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application can also perform other operations or variations of the operations in FIG13, or reasonable exchanges between steps.
S1310,终端设备接收第一消息。S1310, the terminal device receives the first message.
其中,第一消息携带第一信息或第一消息指示第一信息,第一信息包括M个候选小区的配置信息,M为大于1的正整数。The first message carries first information or indicates first information, and the first information includes configuration information of M candidate cells, where M is a positive integer greater than 1.
相应地,网络设备发送第一消息。网络设备可以为基站或CU。Correspondingly, the network device sends a first message. The network device may be a base station or a CU.
可选的,第一消息为RRC重配消息。例如图6或图7或图10步骤4中的RRC重配消息。Optionally, the first message is an RRC reconfiguration message, such as the RRC reconfiguration message in step 4 of FIG. 6 , FIG. 7 , or FIG. 10 .
一个示例中,第一信息包括M个候选小区的配置信息为,M个候选小区的配置信息分别包含在M个RRC重配消息中,该M个RRC重配消息包含在第一消息中。也即每个候选小区的配置信息包含在一个RRC重配消息中,第一信息包含该M个RRC重配消息。In one example, the first information includes configuration information of M candidate cells, and the configuration information of the M candidate cells is respectively included in M RRC reconfiguration messages, and the M RRC reconfiguration messages are included in the first message. That is, the configuration information of each candidate cell is included in one RRC reconfiguration message, and the first information includes the M RRC reconfiguration messages.
另一示例中,第一信息包括M个候选小区的配置信息为,M个候选小区的配置信息分别包含在M个IE(例如CellGroupConfig IE)中,该M个IE包含在第一消息中。也即每个候选小区的配置信息包含在一个IE中,第一信息包含该M个IE。In another example, the first information includes configuration information of M candidate cells, and the configuration information of the M candidate cells is respectively included in M IEs (e.g., CellGroupConfig IE), and the M IEs are included in the first message. That is, the configuration information of each candidate cell is included in one IE, and the first information includes the M IEs.
S1320,终端设备发送第二消息。S1320, the terminal device sends a second message.
其中,第二消息携带M个第二信息,该M个第二信息与M个候选小区的配置信息对应。The second message carries M second information, and the M second information corresponds to the configuration information of the M candidate cells.
相应地,网络设备接收第二消息。Accordingly, the network device receives the second message.
例如,终端设备向网络设备发送的第二消息中包含3个第二信息,这3个第二信息与3个候选小区的配置信息一一对应。例如,第一个第二信息对应候选小区1,第二个第二信息对应候选小区2,第三个第二信息对应候选小区3。For example, the second message sent by the terminal device to the network device includes three second information, and the three second information correspond to the configuration information of the three candidate cells one by one. For example, the first second information corresponds to candidate cell 1, the second second information corresponds to candidate cell 2, and the third second information corresponds to candidate cell 3.
可选的,第二消息为RRC重配完成消息。例如图6或图7或图10步骤5中的RRC重配完成消息。Optionally, the second message is an RRC reconfiguration complete message, such as the RRC reconfiguration complete message in step 5 of FIG. 6 , FIG. 7 , or FIG. 10 .
第二信息与候选小区的配置信息对应,可以理解为终端设备在接收到候选小区的配置信息后,根据候选小区的配置信息,设置第二信息的内容或取值。M个第二信息与M各候选小区的配置信息对应,可以理解为终端设备根据每个候选小区的配置信息,设置每个第二信息的内容或取值,从而确定M个第二信息的内容,并包含在第二消息中。可选的,第二信息与候选小区的配置信息对应也可以理解为第二信息与候选小区对应。The second information corresponds to the configuration information of the candidate cell, which can be understood as the terminal device setting the content or value of the second information according to the configuration information of the candidate cell after receiving the configuration information of the candidate cell. The M second information corresponds to the configuration information of each of the M candidate cells, which can be understood as the terminal device setting the content or value of each second information according to the configuration information of each candidate cell, thereby determining the content of the M second information and including it in the second message. Optionally, the second information corresponding to the configuration information of the candidate cell can also be understood as the second information corresponding to the candidate cell.
可选的,第二信息包括以下信息中的一项或多项:Optionally, the second information includes one or more of the following information:
上行直流参数,例如表1中的uplinkTxDirectCurrentList或 uplinkTxDirectCurrentTwoCarrierList或uplinkTxDirectCurrentMoreCarrierList;Uplink DC parameters, such as uplinkTxDirectCurrentList or uplinkTxDirectCurrentTwoCarrierList or uplinkTxDirectCurrentMoreCarrierList;
条件主辅小区PSCell添加或变更相关参数,例如表1中的selectedCondRRCReconfig;Conditional primary and secondary cells PSCell add or change related parameters, such as selectedCondRRCReconfig in Table 1;
测量报告可用指示,例如表1中的ue-MeasurementsAvailable;Measurement report available indication, such as ue-MeasurementsAvailable in Table 1;
测量间隙需求指示,例如表1中的needForGapsConfigNR或needForGapNCSG-InfoNR或needForGapNCSG-InfoEUTRA。The measurement gap requirement indication, such as needForGapsConfigNR or needForGapNCSG-InfoNR or needForGapNCSG-InfoEUTRA in Table 1.
本申请中,测量间隙也可以理解为测量间隔。In the present application, the measurement gap may also be understood as a measurement interval.
可以理解地,第二信息为RRC重配完成消息中包含的信息。It can be understood that the second information is the information included in the RRC reconfiguration complete message.
例如,终端设备根据候选小区配置中包括的报告上行直流指示指示(例如reportUplinkTxDirectCurrent或reportUplinkTxDirectCurrentTwoCarrier或reportUplinkTxDirectCurrentMoreCarrier)确定是否在该候选小区对应的第二信息中包括上行直流参数。再例如,终端设备根据自身是否记录了可用的测量以及候选小区配置中的记录测量报告配置(例VarLogMeasReport)确定是否在该候选小区对应的第二信息中包括测量报告可用指示。再例如,终端设备根据候选小区配置中的需要间隙配置(例如needForGapsConfigNR或needForGapNCSG-ConfigNR或needForGapNCSG-ConfigEUTRA等)确定是否在该候选小区对应的第二信息中包括测量间隙需求指示。For example, the terminal device determines whether to include the uplink DC parameters in the second information corresponding to the candidate cell according to the report uplink DC indication included in the candidate cell configuration (e.g., reportUplinkTxDirectCurrent or reportUplinkTxDirectCurrentTwoCarrier or reportUplinkTxDirectCurrentMoreCarrier). For another example, the terminal device determines whether to include the measurement report available indication in the second information corresponding to the candidate cell according to whether it has recorded available measurements and the recorded measurement report configuration (e.g., VarLogMeasReport) in the candidate cell configuration. For another example, the terminal device determines whether to include the measurement gap requirement indication in the second information corresponding to the candidate cell according to the required gap configuration (e.g., needForGapsConfigNR or needForGapNCSG-ConfigNR or needForGapNCSG-ConfigEUTRA, etc.) in the candidate cell configuration.
一种实现方式中,M个第二信息分别包含在M个IE中,每个IE包含了以上一项或多项信息。也即每个IE包含了每个候选小区的第二信息。In one implementation, the M second information are respectively included in M IEs, and each IE includes one or more of the above information, that is, each IE includes the second information of each candidate cell.
另一种实现方式,第二消息包括M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息,该M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息携带M个第二信息。也即每个候选小区的第二信息包含在一个RRC重配完成消息中,M个重配完成消息包含在第二消息中。In another implementation, the second message includes RRC reconfiguration complete messages of M candidate cells, and the RRC reconfiguration complete messages of the M candidate cells carry M second information. That is, the second information of each candidate cell is included in one RRC reconfiguration complete message, and the M reconfiguration complete messages are included in the second message.
一种可选的实现方式,M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息不包括RRC处理标识,即表1中的rrc-TransactionIdentifier。在该实现方式中,终端设备发送给网络设备的第一信息中包含的M个候选小区的配置信息包含在M个IE(例如CellGroupConfig IE)中,而不是包含在M个RRC重配消息中。M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息并不用于响应M个RRC重配消息,因此无需包含RRC处理标识来标识RRC重配过程。该实现方式中,通过M个RRC重配完成消息中不包括RRC处理标识避免了终端设备无法设置RRC处理标识取值的问题,也避免了网络设备接收到RRC处理标识后无法确定对应的RRC过程或对应错误的RRC处理过程的问题。In an optional implementation, the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells does not include the RRC processing identifier, i.e., the rrc-TransactionIdentifier in Table 1. In this implementation, the configuration information of the M candidate cells included in the first information sent by the terminal device to the network device is included in M IEs (e.g., CellGroupConfig IE), rather than in M RRC reconfiguration messages. The RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells is not used to respond to the M RRC reconfiguration messages, so there is no need to include the RRC processing identifier to identify the RRC reconfiguration process. In this implementation, by not including the RRC processing identifier in the M RRC reconfiguration completion messages, the problem of the terminal device being unable to set the value of the RRC processing identifier is avoided, and the problem of the network device being unable to determine the corresponding RRC process or the corresponding erroneous RRC processing process after receiving the RRC processing identifier is also avoided.
一种可选的实现方式,第二信息关联或包含了指示信息,该指示信息用于指示该第二信息对应的候选小区或候选小区的配置信息。通过该指示信息,可以使终端设备向网络设备发送的第二信息与网络设备发送给终端设备的候选小区的配置信息关联起来。每个候选小区的配置信息是包含一个RRC重配消息且第二信息包含在RRC重配完成消息中时,可以依赖于其中包含的RRC处理标识来与RRC重配完成消息对应,但考虑到RRC处理标识的取值有限,占用太多的RRC处理标识可能导致终端设备和网络设备之间RRC过程的限制,该实现方式中的指示信息则解决了该限制问题。In an optional implementation, the second information is associated with or includes indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate the candidate cell or the configuration information of the candidate cell corresponding to the second information. Through the indication information, the second information sent by the terminal device to the network device can be associated with the configuration information of the candidate cell sent by the network device to the terminal device. When the configuration information of each candidate cell includes an RRC reconfiguration message and the second information is included in the RRC reconfiguration completion message, it can rely on the RRC processing identifier contained therein to correspond to the RRC reconfiguration completion message, but considering that the value of the RRC processing identifier is limited, occupying too many RRC processing identifiers may lead to restrictions on the RRC process between the terminal device and the network device. The indication information in this implementation solves this restriction problem.
终端设备通过在第二消息中包括M个候选小区的第二信息并发送给网络设备,将M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息中的信息发送候选小区,解决了候选小区无法获取RRC重配完成消息中的信息的问题,避免了候选小区无法正确配置终端设备以及终端设备无法正常数传的问题。The terminal device includes the second information of M candidate cells in the second message and sends it to the network device, and sends the information in the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells to the candidate cells, thereby solving the problem that the candidate cells cannot obtain the information in the RRC reconfiguration completion message, and avoiding the problem that the candidate cells cannot correctly configure the terminal device and the terminal device cannot transmit data normally.
S1330,终端设备接入第一小区。S1330, the terminal device accesses the first cell.
其中,第一小区属于M个候选小区。 Among them, the first cell belongs to M candidate cells.
相应的,第一小区所属的网络设备在终端设备接入第一小区时,与终端设备执行接入过程。可参见图6或图7中步骤9或图10中的步骤9、步骤15。可选的,如图13所示,第一小区所属的网络设备为发送第一消息的网络设备。Correspondingly, when the terminal device accesses the first cell, the network device to which the first cell belongs performs an access process with the terminal device. See step 9 in Figure 6 or Figure 7 or step 9 and step 15 in Figure 10. Optionally, as shown in Figure 13, the network device to which the first cell belongs is the network device that sends the first message.
可选的,在接入第一小区前,终端设备接收第一指示信息。其中,第一指示信息指示终端设备接入第一小区。相应的,网络设备发送第一指示信息。第一指示信息可以承载在L1/L2信令中,例如承载在MAC CE或DCI中。可选的,第一指示信息承载在L1/L2触发移动性小区变更命令中,可参见图6或图7中步骤8或图10中的步骤8、步骤14。第一指示信息中指示小区变更的目标小区为第一小区,终端设备接收到第一指示信息后,根据第一指示信息的内容,向第一小区执行接入过程,例如通过RACH过程或其他过程(例如RACH-less)。Optionally, before accessing the first cell, the terminal device receives first indication information. The first indication information indicates that the terminal device accesses the first cell. Accordingly, the network device sends the first indication information. The first indication information can be carried in L1/L2 signaling, such as carried in MAC CE or DCI. Optionally, the first indication information is carried in the L1/L2 triggered mobility cell change command, see step 8 in Figure 6 or Figure 7 or steps 8 and 14 in Figure 10. The target cell for indicating the cell change in the first indication information is the first cell. After receiving the first indication information, the terminal device performs an access process to the first cell according to the content of the first indication information, such as through a RACH process or other processes (such as RACH-less).
可选的,终端设备在接收第一指示信息之前可以执行L1测量,并向网络设备发送测量报告,可参见图6或图7中步骤6或图10中的步骤6、步骤12。Optionally, before receiving the first indication information, the terminal device may perform L1 measurement and send a measurement report to the network device, see step 6 in FIG. 6 or FIG. 7 or steps 6 and 12 in FIG. 10 .
可选的,网络设备向第一小区所属的DU发送与第一小区对应的第二信息,例如发送第二信息中的部分信息。可选的,网络设备可以理解为CU,或者网络设备包括第一小区所属的DU,例如网络设备为基站。可以理解地,网络设备可以在接收到M个候选小区的第二信息时向M个候选小区所属的DU递交对应的第二信息。第二信息中包含了DU配置需要的或DU需要使用的参数,因此在终端设备接入之前或终端设备接入时,DU需要获取第二信息。Optionally, the network device sends second information corresponding to the first cell to the DU to which the first cell belongs, for example, sending part of the information in the second information. Optionally, the network device can be understood as a CU, or the network device includes the DU to which the first cell belongs, for example, the network device is a base station. It can be understood that the network device can submit corresponding second information to the DUs to which the M candidate cells belong when receiving the second information of the M candidate cells. The second information includes parameters required for DU configuration or required to be used by the DU, so the DU needs to obtain the second information before or when the terminal device accesses.
例如,如图14所示,以CU内DU间的L1/L2触发移动性为例对上述方案进行说明,其他L1/L2触发移动性的场景可以参考本实施例,不再赘述。For example, as shown in FIG. 14 , the above solution is illustrated by taking L1/L2 triggered mobility between DUs within a CU as an example. Other scenarios of L1/L2 triggered mobility may refer to this embodiment and will not be described in detail.
在图14的步骤4中,终端设备接收到来自基站(例如CU)的RRC重配消息,该重配完成消息中包含一个或多个候选小区的L1/L2触发移动性配置信息。每个候选小区的L1/L2触发移动性配置信息可以包含在一个IE(例如CellGroupConfig)中,或包含在一个RRC重配消息中。In step 4 of Figure 14, the terminal device receives an RRC reconfiguration message from a base station (e.g., CU), and the reconfiguration complete message includes L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration information of one or more candidate cells. The L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration information of each candidate cell can be included in an IE (e.g., CellGroupConfig) or in an RRC reconfiguration message.
在图14的步骤5中,终端设备发送RRC重配完成消息,其中该重配完成消息中包括了以下中的一项:In step 5 of FIG. 14 , the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message, wherein the reconfiguration complete message includes one of the following:
a)一个或多个候选小区对应的一个或多个RRC重配完成消息。例如步骤5中终端设备向网络设备发送的RRC重配完成消息中包含候选小区的RRC重配完成消息列表。其中,可选的,每个候选小区对应的RRC重配完成消息中不包括RRC处理标识。可选的,每个候选小区对应的RRC重配完成消息关联了指示信息,该指示信息用于指示该RRC重配完成消息对应的候选小区或候选小区的配置,例如该指示信息为候选小区配置标识。a) One or more RRC reconfiguration completion messages corresponding to one or more candidate cells. For example, the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent by the terminal device to the network device in step 5 includes a list of RRC reconfiguration completion messages of the candidate cells. Optionally, the RRC reconfiguration completion message corresponding to each candidate cell does not include an RRC processing identifier. Optionally, the RRC reconfiguration completion message corresponding to each candidate cell is associated with indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate the candidate cell or the configuration of the candidate cell corresponding to the RRC reconfiguration completion message, for example, the indication information is a candidate cell configuration identifier.
b)一个或多个候选小区对应的一个或多个信息列表。例如步骤5中终端设备向网络设备发送的RRC重配完成消息中包含每个候选小区相关的信息列表。每个候选小区相关的信息列表中包括了上行直流参数、CPAC相关参数、测量报告是否可得、是否需要测量gap等信息中的一项或多项。即原本包含在RRC重配完成消息(例如图14步骤10中的RRC重配完成消息)中的信息。可选的,每个候选小区对应的信息列表关联了指示信息,该指示信息用于指示该信息列表对应的候选小区或候选小区的配置,例如该指示信息为候选小区配置标识。b) One or more information lists corresponding to one or more candidate cells. For example, the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent by the terminal device to the network device in step 5 contains an information list related to each candidate cell. The information list related to each candidate cell includes one or more of the uplink DC parameters, CPAC related parameters, whether the measurement report is available, whether the gap measurement is required, and other information. That is, the information originally contained in the RRC reconfiguration completion message (for example, the RRC reconfiguration completion message in step 10 of Figure 14). Optionally, the information list corresponding to each candidate cell is associated with indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate the candidate cell or the configuration of the candidate cell corresponding to the information list, for example, the indication information is a candidate cell configuration identifier.
基站(例如CU)在接收到各个候选小区的相关信息后,存储该信息。CU可以将接收到的各个候选小区相关信息递交给对应的DU。或者,当终端设备被触发切换到某个候选小区时,CU使用该候选小区的信息,或向候选小区所属的DU发送相关信息,供DU使用。After receiving the relevant information of each candidate cell, the base station (such as CU) stores the information. The CU can deliver the received relevant information of each candidate cell to the corresponding DU. Alternatively, when the terminal device is triggered to switch to a candidate cell, the CU uses the information of the candidate cell or sends relevant information to the DU to which the candidate cell belongs for use by the DU.
在后续L1/L2触发移动性过程中,终端设备不再向基站发送RRC重配完成消息。In the subsequent L1/L2 triggered mobility process, the terminal device no longer sends an RRC reconfiguration completion message to the base station.
在上述方案中,终端设备在回复包含L1/L2触发移动性配置信息的RRC重配消息的 RRC重配完成消息中,包含多个候选小区的信息。终端设备根据候选小区的配置信息确定多个候选小区的信息,并在向网络设备发送的第二消息中包含该多个候选小区的信息,用于候选小区后续更好地配置终端设备,保证了终端设备在接入该候选小区后能够被提供更好的配置信息,提高通信效率。该多个候选小区的信息包含了针对多个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息中原本包含的信息。终端设备通过提前向CU提供各个候选小区的相关信息,解决了候选小区无法获知RRC重配完成消息的问题,保证了候选小区能在终端设备切换后正确地配置终端设备,保证正常通信。而且避免了L1/L2触发移动性过程中RRC消息的传输,避免了层间交互以及RRC处理的时延,降低了L1/L2触发移动性过程的时延和中断时间。在连续切换的场景中,终端设备在回复L1/L2触发移动性配置信息的RRC重配消息的RRC重配完成消息中反馈了候选小区的需要的信息,如此终端设备在后续接入同一个候选小区时也无需发送重复的信息,减少了冗余的信息传输,节省了空口资源。In the above solution, the terminal device responds to the RRC reconfiguration message containing the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration information. The RRC reconfiguration completion message includes information about multiple candidate cells. The terminal device determines the information about multiple candidate cells based on the configuration information of the candidate cells, and includes the information about the multiple candidate cells in the second message sent to the network device, which is used for the candidate cells to better configure the terminal device in the future, ensuring that the terminal device can be provided with better configuration information after accessing the candidate cell, thereby improving communication efficiency. The information about the multiple candidate cells includes the information originally included in the RRC reconfiguration completion message for multiple candidate cells. The terminal device solves the problem that the candidate cell cannot obtain the RRC reconfiguration completion message by providing the CU with relevant information about each candidate cell in advance, ensuring that the candidate cell can correctly configure the terminal device after the terminal device is switched, and ensuring normal communication. It also avoids the transmission of RRC messages during the L1/L2 triggered mobility process, avoids the delay of inter-layer interaction and RRC processing, and reduces the delay and interruption time of the L1/L2 triggered mobility process. In the scenario of continuous switching, the terminal device feeds back the required information of the candidate cell in the RRC reconfiguration completion message in reply to the RRC reconfiguration message that triggers the L1/L2 mobility configuration information. In this way, the terminal device does not need to send repeated information when accessing the same candidate cell subsequently, reducing redundant information transmission and saving air interface resources.
图15是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的一例示意图。该方法可以由终端设备和网络设备执行,或者也可以由终端设备中的芯片和网络设备中的芯片执行。应理解,图15示出了该通信方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其他操作或者图15中的各个操作的变形,或者是合理的步骤间的调换。FIG15 is a schematic diagram of an example of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application. The method can be performed by a terminal device and a network device, or can also be performed by a chip in a terminal device and a chip in a network device. It should be understood that FIG15 shows the steps or operations of the communication method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application can also perform other operations or variations of the operations in FIG15, or reasonable exchanges between steps.
S1510,终端设备接收第三消息。S1510, the terminal device receives the third message.
其中,第三消息包括第三信息或第三消息指示第三信息,该第三信息中包括N个候选小区的配置信息和N个配置标识,该N个配置标识用于标识N个候选小区的配置信息,N为正整数。候选小区的配置信息与配置标识相关联,N个候选小区的配置信息分别与N个配置标识相关联。配置标识可以为从1开始依次递加的正整数,例如配置标识可以为1,2,3,依次类推。The third message includes the third information or the third message indicates the third information, and the third information includes configuration information of N candidate cells and N configuration identifiers, and the N configuration identifiers are used to identify the configuration information of the N candidate cells, and N is a positive integer. The configuration information of the candidate cells is associated with the configuration identifier, and the configuration information of the N candidate cells is associated with the N configuration identifiers respectively. The configuration identifier can be a positive integer that increases sequentially starting from 1, for example, the configuration identifier can be 1, 2, 3, and so on.
相应的,网络设备发送第三消息。Correspondingly, the network device sends a third message.
N个配置标识用于标识N个候选小区的配置信息,可以理解为每个候选小区的配置信息关联一个配置标识。例如,网络设备向终端设备发送的第三消息中包括2个候选小区的配置信息和2个配置标识,候选小区1的配置标识为1,候选小区2的配置标识为2。可选的,这里的配置标识与RRC处理标识不同。N configuration identifiers are used to identify the configuration information of N candidate cells, and it can be understood that the configuration information of each candidate cell is associated with a configuration identifier. For example, the third message sent by the network device to the terminal device includes the configuration information of 2 candidate cells and 2 configuration identifiers, the configuration identifier of candidate cell 1 is 1, and the configuration identifier of candidate cell 2 is 2. Optionally, the configuration identifier here is different from the RRC processing identifier.
可选的,第三消息为RRC重配消息。Optionally, the third message is an RRC reconfiguration message.
可选的,N个候选小区的配置信息和N个配置标识包含在N个IE中。也即每个候选小区的配置信息和关联的配置标识包含在一个IE中,N个候选小区的配置信息和关联的N个配置标识包含在第三消息中。Optionally, the configuration information of N candidate cells and N configuration identifiers are included in N IEs. That is, the configuration information of each candidate cell and the associated configuration identifier are included in one IE, and the configuration information of N candidate cells and the associated N configuration identifiers are included in the third message.
S1520,终端设备接收第二指示信息。S1520, the terminal device receives the second indication information.
其中,第二指示信息用于指示终端设备接入到第二小区,该第二小区属于N个候选小区。The second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to access a second cell, which belongs to N candidate cells.
相应的,网络设备发送第二指示信息。Correspondingly, the network device sends second indication information.
可选的,第二指示信息承载在L1/L2信令中,例如承载在MAC CE或DCI中。可选的,第二指示信息承载在L1/L2触发移动性小区变更命令中,可参见图6或图7中步骤8或图10中的步骤8、步骤14。第二指示信息中指示小区变更的目标小区为第二小区,终端设备接收到第二指示信息后,根据第二指示信息的内容,向第二小区执行接入过程,例如通过RACH过程或其他过程(例如RACH-less)。Optionally, the second indication information is carried in L1/L2 signaling, such as in MAC CE or DCI. Optionally, the second indication information is carried in an L1/L2 triggered mobility cell change command, see step 8 in FIG. 6 or FIG. 7 or step 8 and step 14 in FIG. 10. The target cell for indicating the cell change in the second indication information is the second cell. After receiving the second indication information, the terminal device performs an access process to the second cell according to the content of the second indication information, such as through a RACH process or other processes (such as RACH-less).
可选的,终端设备在接收第二指示信息之前可以执行L1测量,并向网络设备发送测量报告,可参见图6或图7中步骤6或图10中的步骤6、步骤12。 Optionally, before receiving the second indication information, the terminal device may perform L1 measurement and send a measurement report to the network device, see step 6 in FIG. 6 or FIG. 7 or steps 6 and 12 in FIG. 10 .
S1530,终端设备发送第四消息。S1530, the terminal device sends a fourth message.
其中,第四消息包括第一标识,该第一标识用于指示第二小区的配置信息。可选的,第一标识可以为第二小区的配置信息关联的配置标识。也即第一标识用于指示第二小区或目标小区关联的配置标识。The fourth message includes a first identifier, and the first identifier is used to indicate the configuration information of the second cell. Optionally, the first identifier may be a configuration identifier associated with the configuration information of the second cell. That is, the first identifier is used to indicate the configuration identifier associated with the second cell or the target cell.
可选的,第一标识与第三信息中的候选小区的配置信息的顺序相关。可以理解为,第四消息中的第一标识用于指示第二小区的配置信息的顺序。也即第一标识指示第二小区的配置信息在所有候选小区配置信息中的顺序。例如,若第二小区的配置信息在所有候选小区配置信息中的顺序为第二个,那么第一标识可以指示为2。可选的,此时第三信息中不包含配置标识。Optionally, the first identifier is related to the order of the configuration information of the candidate cells in the third information. It can be understood that the first identifier in the fourth message is used to indicate the order of the configuration information of the second cell. That is, the first identifier indicates the order of the configuration information of the second cell in all the candidate cell configuration information. For example, if the configuration information of the second cell is the second in the order of all the candidate cell configuration information, then the first identifier can be indicated as 2. Optionally, the third information does not include the configuration identifier at this time.
相应的,网络设备接收第四消息。可选的,这里的网络设备与发送第二指示信息的网络设备可以不同。例如发送第二指示信息的网络设备可以是源DU或源小区所属的基站,接收第四消息的网络设备可以是目标DU或者目标小区所属的基站或者CU。Correspondingly, the network device receives the fourth message. Optionally, the network device here may be different from the network device that sends the second indication information. For example, the network device that sends the second indication information may be a base station to which the source DU or source cell belongs, and the network device that receives the fourth message may be a base station or CU to which the target DU or target cell belongs.
可选的,接收第四消息的网络设备与发送第二指示信息的网络设备可以是同一个网络设备。例如,终端设备的源小区与目标小区属于同一个CU,源小区所属的网络设备可以与目标小区所属的网络设备是同一个网络设备。Optionally, the network device receiving the fourth message and the network device sending the second indication information may be the same network device. For example, the source cell and the target cell of the terminal device belong to the same CU, and the network device to which the source cell belongs may be the same network device as the network device to which the target cell belongs.
可选的,第四消息为RRC重配完成消息。Optionally, the fourth message is an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
可选的,该RRC重配完成消息中不包括RRC处理标识。由于候选小区的配置是包含在IE中发送给终端设备的,也即候选小区没有向终端设备递交的RRC重配消息,因此若候选小区接收到带有RRC处理标识的RRC重配完成消息,无法确定对应的RRC重配过程,导致网络配置混乱。因此该RRC重配完成消息中可以不携带RRC处理标识。Optionally, the RRC reconfiguration complete message does not include the RRC processing identifier. Since the configuration of the candidate cell is included in the IE and sent to the terminal device, that is, the candidate cell does not submit an RRC reconfiguration message to the terminal device, if the candidate cell receives an RRC reconfiguration complete message with an RRC processing identifier, the corresponding RRC reconfiguration process cannot be determined, resulting in network configuration confusion. Therefore, the RRC reconfiguration complete message may not carry the RRC processing identifier.
例如,如图16所示,以CU内DU间的L1/L2触发移动性为例对上述方案进行说明,其他L1/L2触发移动性的场景可以参考本实施例,不再赘述。For example, as shown in FIG. 16 , the above solution is illustrated by taking L1/L2 triggered mobility between DUs within a CU as an example. Other scenarios of L1/L2 triggered mobility may refer to this embodiment and will not be described in detail.
在图16的步骤4中,终端设备接收到来自基站(例如CU)的RRC重配消息,该重配消息中包含一个或多个候选小区的L1/L2触发移动性配置信息。针对每个候选小区的触发移动性配置信息可以包含在一个IE(例如CellGroupConfig)中,且关联了配置标识,用于标识该配置。In step 4 of Figure 16, the terminal device receives an RRC reconfiguration message from a base station (e.g., CU), which includes L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration information of one or more candidate cells. The triggered mobility configuration information for each candidate cell can be included in an IE (e.g., CellGroupConfig) and is associated with a configuration identifier for identifying the configuration.
在图16的步骤5中,终端设备向CU或基站发送RRC重配完成消息;In step 5 of FIG. 16 , the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration completion message to the CU or the base station;
步骤6~9:与图6或图7或图10相同,为第一次执行L1/L2触发移动性的过程;Steps 6 to 9: are the same as FIG. 6 or FIG. 7 or FIG. 10, and are the first execution of the L1/L2 triggered mobility process;
步骤10中,终端设备向基站发送RRC重配完成消息,其中该消息中包括了切换后的候选小区(或目标小区)关联的配置标识。可选的,该RRC重配完成消息中不包括RRC处理标识;In step 10, the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the base station, wherein the message includes a configuration identifier associated with the candidate cell (or target cell) after the handover. Optionally, the RRC reconfiguration complete message does not include an RRC processing identifier;
步骤11~15:与图10相同,为第二次执行L1/L2触发移动性的过程;Steps 11 to 15: are the same as FIG. 10 , and are the second execution of the L1/L2 triggered mobility process;
步骤16中,终端设备向基站发送RRC重配完成消息,其中该消息中包括了切换后的候选小区关联的配置标识。可选的,该RRC重配完成消息中不包括RRC处理标识;In step 16, the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration completion message to the base station, wherein the message includes a configuration identifier associated with the candidate cell after the switch. Optionally, the RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include an RRC processing identifier;
CU在收到该RRC重配完成消息之后,可以将该消息中的内容与切换后的候选小区关联起来。CU基于接收到的配置标识或第一标识确定后续使用的配置信息。After receiving the RRC reconfiguration completion message, the CU may associate the content in the message with the candidate cell after the handover. The CU determines the configuration information to be used subsequently based on the received configuration identifier or the first identifier.
上述方案将RRC重配完成消息与包含候选小区预配置的IE关联起来。通过将RRC重配完成消息与候选小区预配置关联,使得切换后的候选小区可以获知RRC重配完成消息对应的候选小区或候选小区配置,一方面解决了由于没有RRC重配消息而导致的候选小区无法获知RRC重配完成消息的问题,另一方面还将终端设备发送的信息与目标小区配置相关联,保证了候选小区能在终端设备切换后正确地配置终端设备,保证正常通信。 相比于使用RRC处理标识来关联,第一标识可以有更多的取值,避免了占用较多的RRC处理标识带来的网络配置受限的问题。The above scheme associates the RRC reconfiguration completion message with the IE containing the candidate cell preconfiguration. By associating the RRC reconfiguration completion message with the candidate cell preconfiguration, the candidate cell after switching can obtain the candidate cell or candidate cell configuration corresponding to the RRC reconfiguration completion message. On the one hand, it solves the problem that the candidate cell cannot obtain the RRC reconfiguration completion message due to the absence of the RRC reconfiguration message. On the other hand, it also associates the information sent by the terminal device with the target cell configuration, ensuring that the candidate cell can correctly configure the terminal device after the terminal device is switched, ensuring normal communication. Compared with using the RRC processing identifier for association, the first identifier can have more values, thus avoiding the problem of limited network configuration caused by occupying more RRC processing identifiers.
在L1/L2触发移动性过程中,若终端设备多次接入同一候选小区,则终端设备回复该候选小区的RRC重配完成消息的内容是相同的。例如,若终端设备不是第一次接入目标小区,那么终端设备在图6步骤10中向目标小区发送的RRC重配完成消息与第一次接入目标小区时发送的内容是相同的。这样终端设备多次发送相同的内容,增加了额外的信令开销。且L1/L2触发移动性的目标为降低切换时延和终端时间,在L1/L2触发移动性过程中多次发送RRC消息,会增加层间交互的时延和RRC处理时延,与L1/L2触发移动性降低时延的目的相冲突。During the L1/L2 triggered mobility process, if the terminal device accesses the same candidate cell multiple times, the content of the RRC reconfiguration completion message that the terminal device replies to the candidate cell is the same. For example, if this is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the target cell, the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent by the terminal device to the target cell in step 10 of Figure 6 is the same as the content sent when it first accesses the target cell. In this way, the terminal device sends the same content multiple times, which adds additional signaling overhead. In addition, the goal of L1/L2 triggered mobility is to reduce switching delay and terminal time. Sending RRC messages multiple times during the L1/L2 triggered mobility process will increase the delay of inter-layer interaction and RRC processing delay, which conflicts with the purpose of L1/L2 triggered mobility to reduce delay.
在CPAC过程中,若终端设备多次接入同一候选PSCell,则终端设备回复该候选小区的SN重配完成消息的内容是相同的。例如,在CPC过程的图9步骤5中,若终端设备不是第一次接入目标SN下的该候选小区,那么终端设备向MN发送的RRC重配完成消息中包含的目标SN的RRC重配完成消息,与第一次接入目标SN下的该候选小区时发送的目标SN的RRC重配完成消息是相同的。这样终端设备多次发送相同的内容,增加了额外的信令开销。In the CPAC process, if the terminal device accesses the same candidate PSCell multiple times, the content of the SN reconfiguration completion message that the terminal device replies to the candidate cell is the same. For example, in step 5 of Figure 9 of the CPC process, if the terminal device is not accessing the candidate cell under the target SN for the first time, the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the target SN contained in the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent by the terminal device to the MN is the same as the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the target SN sent when accessing the candidate cell under the target SN for the first time. In this way, the terminal device sends the same content multiple times, which increases additional signaling overhead.
为了解决上述问题,本申请实施例提供一种切换方法,用于切换场景下非第一次进入候选小区时切换过程中的RRC消息的发送,避免了信息冗余造成的信令开销的问题,降低了空口资源的消耗。In order to solve the above problems, an embodiment of the present application provides a switching method for sending RRC messages during the switching process when entering a candidate cell for a non-first time in a switching scenario, thereby avoiding the problem of signaling overhead caused by information redundancy and reducing the consumption of air interface resources.
图17是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的一例示意图。该方法可以由终端设备和网络设备执行,或者也可以由终端设备中的芯片和网络设备中的芯片执行。应理解,图17示出了该通信方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其他操作或者图17中的各个操作的变形,或者是合理的步骤间的调换。FIG17 is a schematic diagram of an example of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application. The method can be performed by a terminal device and a network device, or can also be performed by a chip in a terminal device and a chip in a network device. It should be understood that FIG17 shows the steps or operations of the communication method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application can also perform other operations or variations of the operations in FIG17, or reasonable exchanges between steps.
S1710,终端设备接收第五消息。S1710, the terminal device receives the fifth message.
其中,第五消息包括L个候选小区的配置信息,L为正整数。The fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer.
相应的,第一网络设备向终端设备发送第五消息。Correspondingly, the first network device sends a fifth message to the terminal device.
可选的,第五消息可以是RRC重配消息。L个候选小区可以是L1/L2触发移动性的候选小区,或者L个候选小区可以是CPAC的候选PSCell。Optionally, the fifth message may be an RRC reconfiguration message. The L candidate cells may be candidate cells for L1/L2 triggered mobility, or the L candidate cells may be candidate PSCells for CPAC.
S1720,终端设备接入第三小区。S1720, the terminal device accesses the third cell.
其中,第三小区属于L个候选小区。Among them, the third cell belongs to L candidate cells.
相应的,第三小区所属的网络设备在终端设备接入第三小区时,与终端设备执行接入过程。可参见图6或图7中的步骤9,或图8中的步骤6,或图9中的步骤8,或图10中的步骤9、步骤15,或图12中的步骤8、步骤12。Correspondingly, when the terminal device accesses the third cell, the network device to which the third cell belongs performs an access process with the terminal device. See step 9 in FIG. 6 or FIG. 7 , or step 6 in FIG. 8 , or step 8 in FIG. 9 , or step 9 and step 15 in FIG. 10 , or step 8 and step 12 in FIG. 12 .
可选的,第三小区所属的网络设备可以是第一网络设备。例如,如图17所示,终端设备就可以向第一网络设备发起接入。Optionally, the network device to which the third cell belongs may be the first network device. For example, as shown in FIG17 , the terminal device may initiate access to the first network device.
可选的,终端设备接入第三小区前,评估第三小区的执行条件被满足,终端设备接入所述第三小区。可选的,这里的评估第三小区的执行条件被满足,可以参考CPAC过程中的执行条件。例如,CPC过程的图9步骤5中的执行条件。在该方式下,终端设备接收到的L个候选小区为CPAC的L个候选PSCell。终端设备接收到CPAC配置后,评估候选小区关联的执行条件。Optionally, before the terminal device accesses the third cell, it is evaluated that the execution condition of the third cell is satisfied, and the terminal device accesses the third cell. Optionally, the execution condition of evaluating the third cell here is satisfied, and reference can be made to the execution condition in the CPAC process. For example, the execution condition in step 5 of Figure 9 of the CPC process. In this way, the L candidate cells received by the terminal device are the L candidate PSCells of CPAC. After receiving the CPAC configuration, the terminal device evaluates the execution condition associated with the candidate cell.
可选的,终端设备接入第三小区前,接收第三指示信息,该第三指示信息指示终端设备接入该第三小区。相应的,第一网络设备发送第三指示信息。可选的,第三指示信息承载在L1/L2信令中,例如承载在MAC CE或DCI中。可选的,第三指示信息承载在L1/L2触发 移动性小区变更命令中,可参见图6或图7中步骤8或图10中的步骤8、步骤14。第三指示信息中指示小区变更的目标小区为第三小区,终端设备接收到第三指示信息后,根据第三指示信息的内容,向第三小区执行接入过程,例如通过RACH过程或其他过程(例如RACH-less)。在该方式下,终端设备接收到的L个候选小区为L个L1/L2触发移动性的候选小区。Optionally, before the terminal device accesses the third cell, it receives third indication information, and the third indication information indicates that the terminal device accesses the third cell. Accordingly, the first network device sends the third indication information. Optionally, the third indication information is carried in L1/L2 signaling, such as carried in MAC CE or DCI. Optionally, the third indication information is carried in L1/L2 triggering In the mobility cell change command, please refer to step 8 in Figure 6 or Figure 7 or step 8 and step 14 in Figure 10. The target cell for indicating the cell change in the third indication information is the third cell. After receiving the third indication information, the terminal device performs an access process to the third cell according to the content of the third indication information, such as through a RACH process or other processes (such as RACH-less). In this way, the L candidate cells received by the terminal device are L candidate cells for L1/L2 triggered mobility.
S1730,终端设备发送第一RRC重配完成消息。S1730, the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message.
其中,第一RRC重配完成消息中包括第三小区对应的配置信息。第一RRC重配完成消息中包括第三小区对应的配置信息可以理解为终端设备根据第三小区的配置信息,设置第一RRC重配完成消息中的内容或取值。The first RRC reconfiguration complete message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell. The first RRC reconfiguration complete message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell, which can be understood as the terminal device setting the content or value in the first RRC reconfiguration complete message according to the configuration information of the third cell.
相应的,第一网络设备接收第一RRC重配完成消息。Correspondingly, the first network device receives a first RRC reconfiguration completion message.
可选的,第一网络设备是第三小区所属的网络设备,此时终端设备就可以直接把第一RRC重配完成消息发送给第三小区所属的网络设备。例如第一网络设备是基站或CU或MN。Optionally, the first network device is a network device to which the third cell belongs, and in this case the terminal device can directly send the first RRC reconfiguration completion message to the network device to which the third cell belongs. For example, the first network device is a base station or a CU or a MN.
可选的,第一网络设备不是第三小区所属的网络设备,此时第一网络设备收到第一RRC重配完成消息后,还需要将第一RRC重配完成消息发送给第三小区所属的网络设备。例如第一网络设备是MN,第三小区所属的网络设备是候选SN。Optionally, the first network device is not the network device to which the third cell belongs. In this case, after receiving the first RRC reconfiguration completion message, the first network device also needs to send the first RRC reconfiguration completion message to the network device to which the third cell belongs. For example, the first network device is an MN, and the network device to which the third cell belongs is a candidate SN.
可选的,S1720和S1730的执行顺序,可以是先执行S1730再执行S1720,也可以是先执行S1720再执行S1730,本申请实施例不做限制。Optionally, the execution order of S1720 and S1730 may be to execute S1730 first and then S1720, or to execute S1720 first and then S1730, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可选的,在发送第一RRC重配完成消息之前,终端设备确定是否第一次接入第三小区。特别的,如果终端设备第一次接入第三小区,则终端设备发送第一RRC重配完成消息。相应的,第一网络设备接收第一RRC重配完成消息。如果终端设备并非第一次接入第三小区,则终端设备不发送第一RRC重配完成消息,或者终端设备发送第二RRC重配完成消息。相应的,第一网络设备接收第二RRC重配完成消息。也就是说,终端设备在执行步骤S1730之前,需要确定是否第一次接入或是否即将第一次接入第三小区。终端设备根据确定的不同的结果,执行不同的行为。Optionally, before sending the first RRC reconfiguration completion message, the terminal device determines whether it is accessing the third cell for the first time. In particular, if the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time, the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message. Accordingly, the first network device receives the first RRC reconfiguration completion message. If it is not the first time for the terminal device to access the third cell, the terminal device does not send the first RRC reconfiguration completion message, or the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message. Accordingly, the first network device receives the second RRC reconfiguration completion message. That is, before executing step S1730, the terminal device needs to determine whether it is accessing the third cell for the first time or is about to access the third cell for the first time. The terminal device performs different actions according to different determined results.
可选的,在以下情况中的一项或多项发生时,终端设备第一次接入某候选小区时,需要发送第一RRC重配完成消息:Optionally, when one or more of the following situations occur, the terminal device needs to send a first RRC reconfiguration completion message when accessing a candidate cell for the first time:
当网络设备配置L1/L2触发移动性配置后,或指示更新L1/L2触发移动性配置后;After the network device configures the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration, or instructs to update the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration;
当网络设备配置CPAC配置后,或更新CPAC配置后。After the network device is configured with CPAC or the CPAC configuration is updated.
例如,终端设备是否第一次接入第三小区可以理解为,终端设备是否是在收到第五消息后第一次接入第三小区。例如,如果终端设备在接收到第五消息后第一次接入第三小区,则终端设备发送第一RRC重配完成消息。相应的,第一网络设备或第三小区所属的网络设备接收第一RRC重配完成消息。如果终端设备在接收到第五消息后并非第一次接入第三小区,则终端设备不发送第一RRC重配完成消息,或者终端设备发送第二RRC重配完成消息。第五消息中可以包含更新后的候选小区的配置信息。在该实现方式中,终端设备在是获得候选小区配置或更新后的候选小区配置后,针对相同的候选小区配置,若并非第一次接入某个候选小区,则终端设备无需再发送重复的RRC重配完成消息的信息,而是不发送或者发送简化的RRC重配完成消息,达到节省信令开销和空口资源的目的。For example, whether the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time can be understood as whether the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message. For example, if the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message. Correspondingly, the first network device or the network device to which the third cell belongs receives the first RRC reconfiguration completion message. If the terminal device does not access the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device does not send the first RRC reconfiguration completion message, or the terminal device sends the second RRC reconfiguration completion message. The fifth message may include the configuration information of the updated candidate cell. In this implementation, after the terminal device obtains the candidate cell configuration or the updated candidate cell configuration, for the same candidate cell configuration, if it is not the first time to access a candidate cell, the terminal device does not need to send repeated RRC reconfiguration completion message information, but does not send or sends a simplified RRC reconfiguration completion message, so as to save signaling overhead and air interface resources.
再例如,终端设备是否第一次接入第三小区可以理解为,终端设备是否是第一定时器运行期间的第一次接入第三小区。例如,如果终端设备在第一定时器运行期间第一次接入第三小区,则终端设备发送第一RRC重配完成消息。相应的,第一网络设备或第三小区所属的网络设备接收第一RRC重配完成消息。如果终端设备在第一定时器运行期间并非 第一次接入第三小区,则终端设备不发送第一RRC重配完成消息,或者终端设备发送第二RRC重配完成消息。可选的,终端设备在接收到第五消息时启动第一定时器。可选的,终端设备在完成切换后停止或重启第一定时器。第一定时器的时长可以是网络配置的或预定义的。在该实现方式中,第一定时器用于控制RRC重配完成信息的维护/保存。在定时器运行期间,若并非第一次接入某个候选小区,则终端设备无需再发送重复的RRC重配完成消息的信息,而是不发送或者发送简化的RRC重配完成消息,达到节省信令开销和空口资源的目的。可选的,若定时器超时,则终端设备每接入候选小区,均发送第一RRC重配完成消息。For another example, whether the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time can be understood as whether the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time during the operation of the first timer. For example, if the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time during the operation of the first timer, the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message. Correspondingly, the first network device or the network device to which the third cell belongs receives the first RRC reconfiguration completion message. If the terminal device is not during the operation of the first timer, When accessing the third cell for the first time, the terminal device does not send the first RRC reconfiguration completion message, or the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message. Optionally, the terminal device starts the first timer when receiving the fifth message. Optionally, the terminal device stops or restarts the first timer after completing the switch. The duration of the first timer can be network-configured or predefined. In this implementation, the first timer is used to control the maintenance/preservation of the RRC reconfiguration completion information. During the operation of the timer, if it is not the first time to access a candidate cell, the terminal device does not need to send repeated RRC reconfiguration completion message information, but does not send or sends a simplified RRC reconfiguration completion message, so as to save signaling overhead and air interface resources. Optionally, if the timer times out, the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message each time it accesses a candidate cell.
可选的,第二RRC重配完成消息中仅包括RRC处理标识,或者第二RRC重配完成消息中仅包括配置标识(可以参考图15中的配置标识),或者第二RRC重配完成消息中仅包括RRC处理标识和配置标识,或者第二RRC重配完成消息为空消息。Optionally, the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes the RRC processing identifier, or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes the configuration identifier (refer to the configuration identifier in Figure 15), or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes the RRC processing identifier and the configuration identifier, or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message is an empty message.
可选的,第二RRC重配完成消息中不包含SN重配完成消息(例如表1中的scg-Response)或第二RRC重配完成消息中包含空的SN重配完成消息,或第二RRC重配完成消息中包含仅包括RRC处理标识和/或配置标识的SN重配完成消息。Optionally, the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include an SN reconfiguration completion message (for example, the scg-Response in Table 1), or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message includes an empty SN reconfiguration completion message, or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message includes an SN reconfiguration completion message that only includes an RRC processing identifier and/or a configuration identifier.
可选的,第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数。一种可能的实现方式中,第一参数为表1中的一个或多个参数。例如,第一参数为是否需要测量间隙(gap)指示参数和/或上行直流参数。例如,若终端设备在接收到第五消息后并非第一次接入第三小区,那么终端设备向第一网络设备发送的第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数。再例如,若终端设备是在接收到第五消息后第一次接入第三小区,那么终端设备发送的RRC重配完成消息中包括第一参数。这样,如果某些参数在终端设备第一次接入到该小区时上报给了网络,那么终端设备再次接入该小区是就不用再上报该参数,使得终端设备发送RRC重配完成消息更加灵活,并节省了信令开销。从表1可以看出,RRC重配完成消息中有的参数占用比特较多,如果重复发送,则消耗的信令开销较大。针对RRC重配完成消息中的第一参数采用这种方式,减少了部分参数的重复上报,降低了信令开销,节省了传输资源。Optionally, the second RRC reconfiguration complete message does not include the first parameter. In a possible implementation, the first parameter is one or more parameters in Table 1. For example, the first parameter is whether a measurement gap (gap) indication parameter and/or an uplink DC parameter is required. For example, if the terminal device is not accessing the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message, the second RRC reconfiguration complete message sent by the terminal device to the first network device does not include the first parameter. For another example, if the terminal device is accessing the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message, the RRC reconfiguration complete message sent by the terminal device includes the first parameter. In this way, if certain parameters are reported to the network when the terminal device first accesses the cell, the terminal device does not need to report the parameter again when it accesses the cell again, making the terminal device more flexible in sending the RRC reconfiguration complete message and saving signaling overhead. As can be seen from Table 1, some parameters in the RRC reconfiguration complete message occupy more bits. If they are sent repeatedly, the signaling overhead consumed is large. This method is used for the first parameter in the RRC reconfiguration complete message, which reduces the repeated reporting of some parameters, reduces the signaling overhead, and saves transmission resources.
可选的,如果第五消息发生了更新,那么终端设备就要重新发送第一参数。例如,终端设备如果是在第五消息更新后第一次接入第三小区,那么终端设备发送的RRC重配完成消息中包括第一参数。即,如果候选小区的配置发生更新,则终端设备第一次接入到候选小区之后也要在RRC重配完成消息中携带第一参数。Optionally, if the fifth message is updated, the terminal device must resend the first parameter. For example, if the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time after the fifth message is updated, the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent by the terminal device includes the first parameter. That is, if the configuration of the candidate cell is updated, the terminal device must also carry the first parameter in the RRC reconfiguration completion message after accessing the candidate cell for the first time.
RRC重配完成消息中携带的参数信息或者可不重复发送的参数(例如第一参数)可以是网络设备配置或者预定义的。例如,在终端设备非第一次接入第三小区的情况下,RRC重配完成消息中携带哪些参数、或者缺失哪些参数(例如无需重复上报)、或者是否可以缺失参数可以是网络设备配置或者预定义的。示例性地,网络设备可以指示终端设备在非第一次接入第三小区的情况下,总是上报第一参数,或者可以不包括第一参数。The parameter information carried in the RRC reconfiguration complete message or the parameters that may not be repeatedly sent (e.g., the first parameter) may be configured or predefined by the network device. For example, in the case where the terminal device is not accessing the third cell for the first time, which parameters are carried in the RRC reconfiguration complete message, or which parameters are missing (e.g., no need to report repeatedly), or whether the parameters can be missing may be configured or predefined by the network device. Exemplarily, the network device may instruct the terminal device to always report the first parameter, or may not include the first parameter, in the case where the terminal device is not accessing the third cell for the first time.
例如,网络设备可以在每个候选小区的配置信息中指示终端设备在RRC重配完成消息中携带哪些参数。例如,在终端设备非第一次接入第三小区的情况下,第二RRC重配完成消息中是否携带上行直流参数。又例如,在终端设备非第一次接入第三小区的情况下,第二RRC重配完成消息中是否携带是否需要测量间隙(gap)指示参数。又例如,终端设备接收第四指示信息,第四指示信息指示终端设备在终端设备非第一次接入第三小区的情况下,RRC重配完成消息中不携带第一参数。相应的,第一网络设备发送第四指示信息。For example, the network device may indicate in the configuration information of each candidate cell which parameters the terminal device carries in the RRC reconfiguration completion message. For example, in a case where the terminal device is not accessing the third cell for the first time, whether the uplink DC parameter is carried in the second RRC reconfiguration completion message. For another example, in a case where the terminal device is not accessing the third cell for the first time, whether the second RRC reconfiguration completion message carries a parameter indicating whether a measurement gap is required. For another example, the terminal device receives fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information indicates to the terminal device that the RRC reconfiguration completion message does not carry the first parameter when the terminal device is not accessing the third cell for the first time. Accordingly, the first network device sends the fourth indication information.
又例如,RRC重配完成消息中缺失的参数也可以是预定义的。例如,终端设备在非第一次切换到候选小区时发送RRC重配完成消息,但是不包括第一参数,例如上行直流信息参数。 For another example, the missing parameter in the RRC reconfiguration complete message may also be predefined. For example, the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message when switching to a candidate cell for a non-first time, but does not include the first parameter, such as the uplink DC information parameter.
例如,网络设备指示终端设备在非第一次切换到某候选小区时可以不上报第一参数;或者网络设备指示终端设备在非第一次切换到某候选小区时上报第一参数。又例如,终端设备接收第五指示信息,第五指示信息指示终端设备收到第五消息后,非第一次接入第三小区时,在RRC重配完成消息中不携带第一参数。这里的RRC重配完成消息可以是第一RRC重配完成消息也可以是第二RRC重配完成消息。相应的,第一网络设备发送第五指示信息。For example, the network device instructs the terminal device not to report the first parameter when it is not the first time to switch to a candidate cell; or the network device instructs the terminal device to report the first parameter when it is not the first time to switch to a candidate cell. For another example, the terminal device receives the fifth indication information, and the fifth indication information indicates that after the terminal device receives the fifth message, when it does not access the third cell for the first time, the first parameter is not carried in the RRC reconfiguration completion message. The RRC reconfiguration completion message here can be the first RRC reconfiguration completion message or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message. Accordingly, the first network device sends the fifth indication information.
可选的,如果第一参数发生变化,那么终端设备需要重新发送第一参数。一种可能的实现方式中,第一参数发生变化,可以理解为终端设备的第一参数与上次上报的第一参数发生了变化。又一种可能的实现方式中,第一参数发生变化,可以理解为终端设备欲上报的第一参数与上次上报的第一参数相比发生了变化。例如,在第一参数变化后,终端设备向第一网络设备发送的RRC重配完成消息中要包括第一参数。也就是说,即便终端设备不是第一次接入第三小区,一旦第一参数发送变化,终端设备要在上报的第二RRC重配完成消息中包含第一参数,或者终端设备上报第一RRC重配完成消息,或者终端设备在上报的第一RRC重配完成消息中包含第一参数。这里的第一参数发生变化,可能是网络设备配置变更触发的,也有可能是终端设备内部实现触发的。Optionally, if the first parameter changes, the terminal device needs to resend the first parameter. In one possible implementation, the change in the first parameter can be understood as the first parameter of the terminal device has changed from the first parameter reported last time. In another possible implementation, the change in the first parameter can be understood as the first parameter to be reported by the terminal device has changed compared with the first parameter reported last time. For example, after the first parameter changes, the first parameter must be included in the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent by the terminal device to the first network device. In other words, even if the terminal device is not accessing the third cell for the first time, once the first parameter is sent and changes, the terminal device must include the first parameter in the second RRC reconfiguration completion message reported, or the terminal device reports the first RRC reconfiguration completion message, or the terminal device includes the first parameter in the first RRC reconfiguration completion message reported. The change in the first parameter here may be triggered by a change in the configuration of the network device, or it may be triggered by the internal implementation of the terminal device.
可选的,如果第一参数没有发生变化,那么终端设备不发送RRC重配完成消息,或者在上报的RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数。例如,如果终端设备的第一参数与上次上报的第一参数相比没有变化,那么终端设备在向第一网络设备上报的第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数。Optionally, if the first parameter has not changed, the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message, or does not include the first parameter in the reported RRC reconfiguration completion message. For example, if the first parameter of the terminal device has not changed compared to the first parameter reported last time, the terminal device does not include the first parameter in the second RRC reconfiguration completion message reported to the first network device.
可以理解地,终端设备和网络设备存储针对某个候选小区发送的RRC重配完成消息的内容,并在后续接入该候选小区时根据存储的RRC重配完成消息的内容确定是否发送第一参数。It can be understood that the terminal device and the network device store the content of the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent for a candidate cell, and determine whether to send the first parameter based on the stored content of the RRC reconfiguration completion message when subsequently accessing the candidate cell.
终端设备在第一次切换到某候选小区时,发送RRC重配完成消息;网络设备(例如CU)保存该完成消息的内容。终端设备再次(非第一次)接入该小区,则终端设备可以不发送RRC重配完成消息,或者发送空的RRC重配完成消息。网络设备若接收到包含RRC处理标识或配置标识的第二RRC重配完成消息,网络识别可以根据RRC处理标识或配置标识找到对应的候选小区,从而找到存储的候选小区对应的完成消息的信息,供后续使用。When the terminal device switches to a candidate cell for the first time, it sends an RRC reconfiguration completion message; the network device (such as CU) saves the content of the completion message. When the terminal device accesses the cell again (not the first time), the terminal device may not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message, or send an empty RRC reconfiguration completion message. If the network device receives a second RRC reconfiguration completion message containing an RRC processing identifier or a configuration identifier, the network identification can find the corresponding candidate cell according to the RRC processing identifier or the configuration identifier, thereby finding the information of the completion message corresponding to the stored candidate cell for subsequent use.
例如,在L1/L2触发移动性场景中,如果终端设备第一次切换到某L1/L2触发移动性候选小区,则向该候选小区所属的网络设备发送RRC重配完成消息。如果终端设备再次(非第一次)接入该候选小区,终端设备不发送RRC重配完成消息,或发送第二RRC重配完成消息。For example, in the L1/L2 triggered mobility scenario, if the terminal device switches to a certain L1/L2 triggered mobility candidate cell for the first time, an RRC reconfiguration completion message is sent to the network device to which the candidate cell belongs. If the terminal device accesses the candidate cell again (not for the first time), the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message, or sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message.
例如,在连续CPAC场景中,如果终端设备第一次切换到某候选小区,则向MN发送RRC重配完成消息(例如图9步骤5),其中包含了发送给该候选PSCell所属的SN的重配完成消息。MN将SN的重配完成消息发送给SN。基站(例如MN或SN)保存该完成消息的内容。如果终端设备再次(非第一次)接入该候选小区,那么终端设备在向MN发送的RRC重配完成消息(例如图12步骤10)中,不包含SN重配完成消息,或包含空的SN重配完成消息,或包含仅包括RRC处理标识和/或配置标识的SN重配完成消息。For example, in a continuous CPAC scenario, if the terminal device switches to a candidate cell for the first time, an RRC reconfiguration completion message is sent to the MN (e.g., step 5 in FIG. 9 ), which includes a reconfiguration completion message sent to the SN to which the candidate PSCell belongs. The MN sends the reconfiguration completion message of the SN to the SN. The base station (e.g., MN or SN) saves the content of the completion message. If the terminal device accesses the candidate cell again (not for the first time), the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent by the terminal device to the MN (e.g., step 10 in FIG. 12 ) does not include an SN reconfiguration completion message, or includes an empty SN reconfiguration completion message, or includes an SN reconfiguration completion message that only includes an RRC processing identifier and/or a configuration identifier.
可选的,在以下情况下,终端设备或网络设备释放保存的RRC重配完成消息的内容:Optionally, in the following cases, the terminal device or the network device releases the stored content of the RRC reconfiguration complete message:
当网络设备释放L1/L2触发移动性过程/配置,或更新L1/L2触发移动性配置后;When the network device releases the L1/L2 triggered mobility process/configuration, or updates the L1/L2 triggered mobility configuration;
当触发了L3切换(例如inter-CU的切换)后;When L3 switching (such as inter-CU switching) is triggered;
当网络设备释放CPAC过程/配置,或更新CPAC配置后;When the network device releases the CPAC process/configuration, or updates the CPAC configuration;
当触发了MN或PCell切换后。When MN or PCell switching is triggered.
上述方案通过减少后续切换过程中的RRC消息的发送,避免了信息冗余造成的信令开销 的问题,降低了空口资源的消耗。针对L1/L2触发移动性的场景,还减少了层间交互和RRC处理的时延,降低了L1/L2触发移动性的时延和中断时间。通过上述方案,在CPAC场景中,一旦终端设备与目标SN之间的RACH过程成功,SN与终端设备即可使用存储的消息内容进行配置和通信;避免冗余的信息,节省开销。The above solution avoids the signaling overhead caused by information redundancy by reducing the sending of RRC messages in the subsequent switching process. The problem of L1/L2 triggered mobility is solved, and the consumption of air interface resources is reduced. For the scenario of L1/L2 triggered mobility, the delay of inter-layer interaction and RRC processing is also reduced, and the delay and interruption time of L1/L2 triggered mobility are reduced. Through the above solution, in the CPAC scenario, once the RACH process between the terminal device and the target SN is successful, the SN and the terminal device can use the stored message content for configuration and communication; avoid redundant information and save overhead.
图18是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的一例示意图。该方法可以由终端设备和网络设备执行,或者也可以由终端设备中的芯片和网络设备中的芯片执行。该通信方法包括:FIG18 is a schematic diagram of an example of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application. The method may be performed by a terminal device and a network device, or may be performed by a chip in a terminal device and a chip in a network device. The communication method includes:
S1810,终端设备接收第五消息。S1810, the terminal device receives the fifth message.
其中,第五消息包括L个候选小区的配置信息,L为正整数。The fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer.
相应的,第一网络设备向终端设备发送第五消息。Correspondingly, the first network device sends a fifth message to the terminal device.
可选的,第五消息可以是RRC重配消息。L个候选小区可以是L1/L2触发移动性的候选小区,或者L个候选小区可以是CPAC的候选PSCell。Optionally, the fifth message may be an RRC reconfiguration message. The L candidate cells may be candidate cells for L1/L2 triggered mobility, or the L candidate cells may be candidate PSCells for CPAC.
S1820,终端设备接入第三小区。S1820, the terminal device accesses the third cell.
其中,第三小区属于L个候选小区。Among them, the third cell belongs to L candidate cells.
相应的,第三小区所属的网络设备在终端设备接入第三小区时,与终端设备执行接入过程。可参加图6或图7中的步骤9,或图8中的步骤6,或图9中的步骤8,或图10中的步骤9、步骤15,或图12中的步骤8、步骤12。Correspondingly, when the terminal device accesses the third cell, the network device to which the third cell belongs performs an access process with the terminal device. See step 9 in FIG. 6 or FIG. 7 , or step 6 in FIG. 8 , or step 8 in FIG. 9 , or step 9 and step 15 in FIG. 10 , or step 8 and step 12 in FIG. 12 .
可选的,第三小区所属的网络设备可以是第二网络设备。例如,如图18所示,终端设备就可以向第二网络设备发起接入。Optionally, the network device to which the third cell belongs may be the second network device. For example, as shown in FIG18 , the terminal device may initiate access to the second network device.
可选的,终端设备接入第三小区前,评估第三小区的执行条件被满足,终端设备接入所述第三小区。可选的,这里的评估第三小区的执行条件被满足,可以参考CPAC过程中的执行条件。例如,CPC过程的图9步骤5中的执行条件。在该方式下,终端设备接收到的L个候选小区为CPAC的L个候选PSCell。终端设备接收到CPAC配置后,评估候选小区关联的执行条件。Optionally, before the terminal device accesses the third cell, it is evaluated that the execution condition of the third cell is satisfied, and the terminal device accesses the third cell. Optionally, the execution condition of evaluating the third cell here is satisfied, and reference can be made to the execution condition in the CPAC process. For example, the execution condition in step 5 of Figure 9 of the CPC process. In this way, the L candidate cells received by the terminal device are the L candidate PSCells of CPAC. After receiving the CPAC configuration, the terminal device evaluates the execution condition associated with the candidate cell.
可选的,终端设备接入第三小区前,接收第三指示信息,该第三指示信息指示终端设备接入该第三小区。相应的,第一网络设备发送第三指示信息。可选的,第三指示信息承载在L1/L2信令中,例如承载在MAC CE或DCI中。可选的,第三指示信息承载在L1/L2触发移动性小区变更命令中,可参见图6或图7中步骤8或图10中的步骤8、步骤14。第三指示信息中指示小区变更的目标小区为第三小区,终端设备接收到第三指示信息后,根据第三指示信息的内容,向第三小区执行接入过程,例如通过RACH过程或其他过程(例如RACH-less)。在该方式下,终端设备接收到的L个候选小区为L个L1/L2触发移动性的候选小区。Optionally, before the terminal device accesses the third cell, it receives third indication information, and the third indication information instructs the terminal device to access the third cell. Accordingly, the first network device sends the third indication information. Optionally, the third indication information is carried in L1/L2 signaling, such as carried in MAC CE or DCI. Optionally, the third indication information is carried in the L1/L2 triggered mobility cell change command, as shown in step 8 in Figure 6 or Figure 7 or steps 8 and 14 in Figure 10. The target cell for indicating the cell change in the third indication information is the third cell. After the terminal device receives the third indication information, it performs an access process to the third cell according to the content of the third indication information, such as through a RACH process or other processes (such as RACH-less). In this way, the L candidate cells received by the terminal device are L candidate cells for L1/L2 triggered mobility.
S1830,终端设备发送第一RRC重配完成消息。S1830, the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message.
其中,第一RRC重配完成消息中包括第三小区对应的配置信息。第一RRC重配完成消息中包括第三小区对应的配置信息可以理解为终端设备根据第三小区的配置信息,设置第一RRC重配完成消息中的内容或取值。The first RRC reconfiguration complete message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell. The first RRC reconfiguration complete message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell, which can be understood as the terminal device setting the content or value in the first RRC reconfiguration complete message according to the configuration information of the third cell.
相应的,第二网络设备接收第一RRC重配完成消息。第二网络设备可以是目标DU。Correspondingly, the second network device receives the first RRC reconfiguration completion message. The second network device may be a target DU.
可选的,S1820和S1830的执行顺序,可以是先执行S1830再执行S1820,也可以是先执行S1820再执行S1830。Optionally, the execution order of S1820 and S1830 may be to execute S1830 first and then S1820, or to execute S1820 first and then S1830.
可选的,在发送第一RRC重配完成消息之前,终端设备确定是否第一次接入第三小区。Optionally, before sending the first RRC reconfiguration completion message, the terminal device determines whether to access the third cell for the first time.
如果终端设备第一次接入第三小区,则终端设备发送第一RRC重配完成消息。相应的, 第二网络设备接收第一RRC重配完成消息。如果终端设备并非第一次接入第三小区,则终端设备不发送第一RRC重配完成消息,或者终端设备发送第二RRC重配完成消息。相应的,第二网络设备接收第二RRC重配完成消息。也就是说,终端设备在执行步骤S1830之前,需要确定是否第一次接入或是否即将第一次接入第三小区。终端设备根据确定的不同的结果,执行不同的行为。If the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time, the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message. The second network device receives the first RRC reconfiguration completion message. If the terminal device is not accessing the third cell for the first time, the terminal device does not send the first RRC reconfiguration completion message, or the terminal device sends the second RRC reconfiguration completion message. Accordingly, the second network device receives the second RRC reconfiguration completion message. That is, before executing step S1830, the terminal device needs to determine whether it is accessing the third cell for the first time or is about to access the third cell for the first time. The terminal device performs different actions according to different determined results.
可选的,第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数。例如,若终端设备在接收到第五消息后并非第一次接入第三小区,那么终端设备向第二网络设备发送的第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数。Optionally, the second RRC reconfiguration complete message does not include the first parameter. For example, if the terminal device does not access the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message, the second RRC reconfiguration complete message sent by the terminal device to the second network device does not include the first parameter.
可选的,如果第一参数没有发生变化,那么终端设备不发送RRC重配完成消息,或者在上报的RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数。例如,如果终端设备的第一参数与上次上报的第一参数相比没有变化,那么终端设备在向第二网络设备上报的第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数。Optionally, if the first parameter has not changed, the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message, or does not include the first parameter in the reported RRC reconfiguration completion message. For example, if the first parameter of the terminal device has not changed compared to the first parameter reported last time, the terminal device does not include the first parameter in the second RRC reconfiguration completion message reported to the second network device.
可选的,如果第一参数发生变化,那么终端设备需要重新发送第一参数。例如,在第一参数变化后,终端设备向第二网络设备发送的RRC重配完成消息中要包括第一参数。Optionally, if the first parameter changes, the terminal device needs to resend the first parameter. For example, after the first parameter changes, the RRC reconfiguration completion message sent by the terminal device to the second network device includes the first parameter.
本实施例的详细步骤可以参考S1710至S1730相关步骤,这里不再赘述。The detailed steps of this embodiment can refer to the relevant steps from S1710 to S1730, which will not be repeated here.
上述方案通过减少后续切换过程中的RRC消息的发送,避免了信息冗余造成的信令开销的问题,降低了空口资源的消耗。针对L1/L2触发移动性的场景,还减少了层间交互和RRC处理的时延,降低了L1/L2触发移动性的时延和中断时间。通过上述方案,在CPAC场景中,一旦终端设备与目标SN之间的RACH过程成功,SN与终端设备即可使用存储的消息内容进行配置和通信,避免冗余的信息,节省开销。The above scheme avoids the signaling overhead caused by information redundancy and reduces the consumption of air interface resources by reducing the sending of RRC messages in the subsequent switching process. For the scenario of L1/L2 triggered mobility, it also reduces the delay of inter-layer interaction and RRC processing, and reduces the delay and interruption time of L1/L2 triggered mobility. Through the above scheme, in the CPAC scenario, once the RACH process between the terminal device and the target SN is successful, the SN and the terminal device can use the stored message content for configuration and communication, avoiding redundant information and saving overhead.
本发明中的各实施例可以独立使用,也可以结合使用。各实施例中的不同步骤也可以独立使用或结合使用。不同实施例中有类似步骤,其描述可以相互引用和参考。The various embodiments of the present invention may be used independently or in combination. The different steps in the various embodiments may also be used independently or in combination. If there are similar steps in different embodiments, their descriptions may be mutually quoted and referenced.
与上述方法对应的,本申请实施例提供了通信设备。图19至图21为本申请的实施例提供的可能的通信装置的结构示意图。这些通信装置可以用于实现上述方法实施例中终端设备或网络设备的功能,因此也能实现上述方法实施例所具备的有益效果。在本申请的实施例中,该通信设备可以是如图1所示的终端设备101,也可以是如图1所示的网络设备102,还可以是应用于终端设备或网络设备的模块(如芯片)。Corresponding to the above method, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device. Figures 19 to 21 are schematic diagrams of the structures of possible communication devices provided by embodiments of the present application. These communication devices can be used to implement the functions of the terminal device or network device in the above method embodiments, and thus can also achieve the beneficial effects possessed by the above method embodiments. In an embodiment of the present application, the communication device can be a terminal device 101 as shown in Figure 1, or a network device 102 as shown in Figure 1, or a module (such as a chip) applied to a terminal device or a network device.
如图19所示,通信装置1900包括处理单元1910和收发单元1920。通信装置1900用于实现上述图13或图15或图17或图18中所示的方法实施例中终端设备或网络设备的功能。As shown in Fig. 19, the communication device 1900 includes a processing unit 1910 and a transceiver unit 1920. The communication device 1900 is used to implement the functions of the terminal device or network device in the method embodiments shown in Fig. 13 or Fig. 15 or Fig. 17 or Fig. 18 above.
当通信装置1900用于实现图13所示的方法实施例中终端设备的功能时:收发单元1920用于接收第一消息,所述第一消息携带第一信息,所述第一信息包括M个候选小区的配置信息,M为大于1的正整数;所述收发单元1920,还用于发送第二消息,所述第二消息携带M个第二信息,所述M个第二信息与所述M个候选小区的配置信息对应;所述收发单元1920,还用于向第一小区发送接入请求,所述第一小区属于所述M个候选小区。When the communication device 1900 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in Figure 13: the transceiver unit 1920 is used to receive a first message, the first message carries first information, the first information includes configuration information of M candidate cells, M is a positive integer greater than 1; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to send a second message, the second message carries M second information, the M second information corresponds to the configuration information of the M candidate cells; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to send an access request to a first cell, the first cell belongs to the M candidate cells.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一消息为无线资源控制RRC重配消息,所述第二消息为RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, the first message is a radio resource control RRC reconfiguration message, and the second message is an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二信息包括以下信息中的一项或多项:In one possible design, the second information includes one or more of the following information:
上行直流参数; Uplink DC parameters;
条件主辅小区PSCell添加或变更相关参数;Conditional primary and secondary cells PSCell add or change related parameters;
测量报告可用指示;Measurement report available indication;
测量间隙需求指示。Measuring gap requirement indication.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二消息包括M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息,所述M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息携带所述M个第二信息。In one possible design, the second message includes an RRC reconfiguration completion message of M candidate cells, and the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells carries the M second information.
在一种可能的设计中,所述M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息不包括RRC处理标识。In one possible design, the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells does not include an RRC processing identifier.
在一种可能的设计中,所述收发单元1920具体用于,接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示接入所述第一小区。In one possible design, the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive first indication information, where the first indication information indicates access to the first cell.
在一种可能的设计中,处理单元1910,用于控制或指示所述收发单元1920进行接收、用于控制或指示所述收发单元1920进行发送。In one possible design, the processing unit 1910 is used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to receive, and is used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to send.
当通信装置1900用于实现图13所示的方法实施例中网络设备的功能时:收发单元1920,用于发送第一消息,所述第一消息携带第一信息,所述第一信息包括M个候选小区的配置信息,M为大于1的正整数;所述收发单元1920,还用于接收第二消息,所述第二消息携带M个第二信息,所述M个第二信息与所述M个候选小区的配置信息对应。When the communication device 1900 is used to implement the function of the network device in the method embodiment shown in Figure 13: the transceiver unit 1920 is used to send a first message, the first message carries first information, the first information includes configuration information of M candidate cells, M is a positive integer greater than 1; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to receive a second message, the second message carries M second information, and the M second information corresponds to the configuration information of the M candidate cells.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一消息为RRC重配消息,所述第二消息为RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, the first message is an RRC reconfiguration message, and the second message is an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二信息包括以下信息中的一项或多项:In one possible design, the second information includes one or more of the following information:
上行直流参数;Uplink DC parameters;
条件主辅小区PSCell添加或变更相关参数;Conditional primary and secondary cells PSCell add or change related parameters;
测量报告可用指示;Measurement report available indication;
测量间隙需求指示。Measuring gap requirement indication.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二消息包括M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息,所述M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息携带所述M个第二信息。In one possible design, the second message includes an RRC reconfiguration completion message of M candidate cells, and the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells carries the M second information.
在一种可能的设计中,所述M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息不包括RRC处理标识。In one possible design, the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells does not include an RRC processing identifier.
在一种可能的设计中,处理单元1910,用于控制或指示所述收发单元1920进行接收、用于控制或指示所述收发单元1920进行发送。In one possible design, the processing unit 1910 is used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to receive, and is used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to send.
当通信装置1900用于实现图15所示的方法实施例中终端设备的功能时:收发单元1920,用于接收第三消息,所述第三消息包括第三信息,所述第三信息中包括N个候选小区的配置信息和N个配置标识,所述N个配置标识用于标识所述N个候选小区的配置信息,N为正整数;所述收发单元1920,还用于接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示接入到第二小区,所述第二小区属于所述N个候选小区;所述收发单元1920,还用于发送第四消息,所述第四消息包括第一标识,其中,所述第一标识用于指示所述第二小区的配置信息。When the communication device 1900 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in Figure 15: the transceiver unit 1920 is used to receive a third message, the third message includes third information, the third information includes configuration information of N candidate cells and N configuration identifiers, the N configuration identifiers are used to identify the configuration information of the N candidate cells, N is a positive integer; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to receive second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate access to a second cell, the second cell belongs to the N candidate cells; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to send a fourth message, the fourth message includes a first identifier, wherein the first identifier is used to indicate the configuration information of the second cell.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第三消息为RRC重配消息,所述第四消息为RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, the third message is an RRC reconfiguration message, and the fourth message is an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,处理单元1910,用于控制或指示所述收发单元1920进行接收、用于控制或指示所述收发单元1920进行发送。In one possible design, the processing unit 1910 is used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to receive, and is used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to send.
通信装置1900用于实现图15所示的方法实施例中网络设备的功能时:收发单元1920, 用于发送第三消息,所述第三消息包括第三信息,所述第三信息中包括N个候选小区的配置信息,N为正整数;所述收发单元1920,还用于发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示终端设备接入到第二小区,所述第二小区属于所述N个候选小区;所述收发单元1920,还用于接收第四消息,所述第四消息包括第一标识;其中,所述第一标识用于指示所述第二小区的配置信息。When the communication device 1900 is used to implement the function of the network device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 15 : the transceiver unit 1920, Used to send a third message, the third message includes third information, the third information includes configuration information of N candidate cells, N is a positive integer; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to send second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device accesses a second cell, and the second cell belongs to the N candidate cells; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to receive a fourth message, the fourth message includes a first identifier; wherein the first identifier is used to indicate the configuration information of the second cell.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第三消息为RRC重配消息,所述第四消息为RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, the third message is an RRC reconfiguration message, and the fourth message is an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,处理单元1910,用于控制或指示所述收发单元1920进行接收、用于控制或指示所述收发单元1920进行发送。In one possible design, the processing unit 1910 is used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to receive, and is used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to send.
当通信装置1900用于实现图17所示的方法实施例中终端设备的功能时:收发单元1920,用于接收第五消息,所述第五消息包括L个候选小区的配置信息,L为正整数;处理单元1910,用于判断收到第五消息后第一次接入第三小区;所述收发单元1920,还用于发送第一RRC重配完成消息,所述第一RRC重配完成消息中包括所述第三小区对应的配置信息,所述第三小区属于所述L个候选小区。When the communication device 1900 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in Figure 17: the transceiver unit 1920 is used to receive the fifth message, and the fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, L is a positive integer; the processing unit 1910 is used to determine the first access to the third cell after receiving the fifth message; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to send a first RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the first RRC reconfiguration completion message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1910,具体用于评估所述第三小区的执行条件被满足;所述收发单元1920,具体用于向第三小区发送接入请求。In a possible design, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to evaluate whether the execution condition of the third cell is met; the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to send an access request to the third cell.
在一种可能的设计中,所述收发单元1920,具体用于,接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示接入所述第三小区。In one possible design, the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive third indication information, where the third indication information indicates access to the third cell.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1910,具体用于判断收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,所述收发单元1920具体用于,发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中仅包括RRC处理标识;或者,所述处理单元1910,用于判断收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,指示所述收发单元1920不发送RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to send a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes an RRC processing identifier; or, the processing unit 1910 is used to determine that it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and instruct the transceiver unit 1920 not to send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1910,具体用于判断收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,所述收发单元1920具体用于,发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数。In one possible design, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to send a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1910,具体用于判断第一参数没有变化,所述收发单元1920具体用于,发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数;或者,所述处理单元1910,用于判断第一参数没有变化,指示所述收发单元1920不发送RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that the first parameter has not changed, and the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to send a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, which does not include the first parameter; or, the processing unit 1910 is used to determine that the first parameter has not changed, and instruct the transceiver unit 1920 not to send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参数为是否需要测量间隙指示参数或上行直流参数。In one possible design, the first parameter is whether a measurement gap indication parameter or an uplink DC parameter is required.
在一种可能的设计中,所述收发单元1920具体用于,接收第四指示信息,第四指示信息指示在第一RRC重配完成消息或第二RRC重配完成消息中不携带第一参数。In one possible design, the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information indicates that the first parameter is not carried in the first RRC reconfiguration completion message or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1910,具体用于控制或指示所述收发单元1920进行接收、具体用于控制或指示所述收发单元1920进行发送。In one possible design, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to receive, and is specifically used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to send.
当通信装置1900用于实现图17所示的方法实施例中第一网络设备的功能时:收发单元1920,用于发送第五消息,所述第五消息包括L个候选小区的配置信息,L为正整数;处理单元1910,用于判断发送第五消息后终端设备第一次接入第三小区;所述收发单元1920,还用于接收第一RRC重配完成消息,所述第一RRC重配完成消息中包括所述第三小区对应的配置信息,所述第三小区属于所述L个候选小区。When the communication device 1900 is used to implement the function of the first network device in the method embodiment shown in Figure 17: the transceiver unit 1920 is used to send the fifth message, and the fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, L is a positive integer; the processing unit 1910 is used to determine whether the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time after sending the fifth message; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to receive a first RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the first RRC reconfiguration completion message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
在一种可能的设计中,所述收发单元1920,具体用于发送所述第三指示信息,所述 第三指示信息指示所述终端设备接入所述第三小区。In one possible design, the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to send the third indication information. The third indication information instructs the terminal device to access the third cell.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1910,具体用于判断收到第五消息后所述终端设备非第一次接入第三小区;所述收发单元1920,具体用于接收第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中仅包括RRC处理标识;或者,所述处理单元1910,具体用于判断收到第五消息后所述终端设备非第一次接入第三小区,所述处理单元1910指示所述收发单元1920不接收RRC重配完成消息;或者,所述处理单元1910,具体用于判断收到第五消息后所述终端设备非第一次接入第三小区,所述处理单元1910不处理RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that this is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message; the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes an RRC processing identifier; or, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that this is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the processing unit 1910 instructs the transceiver unit 1920 not to receive the RRC reconfiguration completion message; or, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that this is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the processing unit 1910 does not process the RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1910,具体用于判断所述终端设备收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,所述收发单元1920,具体用于接收第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数。In one possible design, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1910,具体用于判断第一参数没有变化,所述收发单元1920,具体用于接收第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数;或者,所述处理单元1910,具体用于判断第一参数没有变化,所述处理单元1910指示所述收发单元1920不接收RRC重配完成消息;或者,所述处理单元1910,具体用于判断第一参数没有变化,所述处理单元1910不处理RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that the first parameter has not changed, and the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, which does not include the first parameter; or, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that the first parameter has not changed, and the processing unit 1910 instructs the transceiver unit 1920 not to receive the RRC reconfiguration completion message; or, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that the first parameter has not changed, and the processing unit 1910 does not process the RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参数为是否需要测量间隙指示参数或上行直流参数。In one possible design, the first parameter is whether a measurement gap indication parameter or an uplink DC parameter is required.
在一种可能的设计中,所述收发单元1920,具体用于发送第四指示信息,第四指示信息指示所述终端设备在第一RRC重配完成消息或第二RRC重配完成消息中不携带第一参数。In one possible design, the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to send fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information indicates that the terminal device does not carry the first parameter in the first RRC reconfiguration completion message or the second RRC reconfiguration completion message.
当通信装置1900用于实现图18所示的方法实施例中终端设备的功能时:收发单元1920,用于接收第五消息,所述第五消息包括L个候选小区的配置信息,L为正整数;处理单元1910,用于判断收到第五消息后第一次接入第三小区;所述收发单元1920,还用于发送第一RRC重配完成消息,所述第一RRC重配完成消息中包括所述第三小区对应的配置信息,所述第三小区属于所述L个候选小区。When the communication device 1900 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in Figure 18: the transceiver unit 1920 is used to receive the fifth message, and the fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, L is a positive integer; the processing unit 1910 is used to determine the first access to the third cell after receiving the fifth message; the transceiver unit 1920 is also used to send a first RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the first RRC reconfiguration completion message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1910,具体用于评估所述第三小区的执行条件被满足;所述收发单元1920,具体用于向第三小区发送接入请求。In a possible design, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to evaluate whether the execution condition of the third cell is met; the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to send an access request to the third cell.
在一种可能的设计中,所述收发单元1920,具体用于,接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示接入所述第三小区。In one possible design, the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive third indication information, where the third indication information indicates access to the third cell.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1910,具体用于判断收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,所述收发单元1920具体用于,发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中仅包括RRC处理标识;或者,所述处理单元1910,用于判断收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,指示所述收发单元1920不发送RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to send a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes an RRC processing identifier; or, the processing unit 1910 is used to determine that it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and instruct the transceiver unit 1920 not to send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1910,具体用于控制或指示所述收发单元1920进行接收、具体用于控制或指示所述收发单元1920进行发送。In one possible design, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to receive, and is specifically used to control or instruct the transceiver unit 1920 to send.
当通信装置1900用于实现图18所示的方法实施例中第一网络设备的功能时:收发单元1920,用于发送第五消息,所述第五消息包括L个候选小区的配置信息,L为正整数。When the communication device 1900 is used to implement the function of the first network device in the method embodiment shown in Figure 18: the transceiver unit 1920 is used to send a fifth message, and the fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer.
在一种可能的设计中,所述收发单元1920,具体用于发送所述第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示所述终端设备接入所述第三小区。In a possible design, the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to send the third indication information, and the third indication information indicates that the terminal device accesses the third cell.
当通信装置1900用于实现图18所示的方法实施例中第二网络设备的功能时:处理单元1910,用于判断发送第五消息后终端设备第一次接入第三小区;收发单元1920,用 于接收第一RRC重配完成消息,所述第一RRC重配完成消息中包括所述第三小区对应的配置信息,所述第三小区属于所述L个候选小区。When the communication device 1900 is used to implement the function of the second network device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 18: the processing unit 1910 is used to determine that the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time after sending the fifth message; the transceiver unit 1920 is used A first RRC reconfiguration complete message is received, where the first RRC reconfiguration complete message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1910,具体用于判断收到第五消息后所述终端设备非第一次接入第三小区;所述收发单元1920,具体用于接收第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中仅包括RRC处理标识;或者,所述处理单元1910,具体用于判断收到第五消息后所述终端设备非第一次接入第三小区,所述处理单元1910指示所述收发单元1920不接收RRC重配完成消息;或者,所述处理单元1910,具体用于判断收到第五消息后所述终端设备非第一次接入第三小区,所述处理单元1910不处理RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that this is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message; the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes an RRC processing identifier; or, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that this is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the processing unit 1910 instructs the transceiver unit 1920 not to receive the RRC reconfiguration completion message; or, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that this is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the processing unit 1910 does not process the RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1910,具体用于判断收到第五消息后所述终端设备非第一次接入第三小区,所述收发单元1920,具体用于接收第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数。In one possible design, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that this is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1910,具体用于判断第一参数没有变化,所述收发单元1920,具体用于接收第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数;或者,所述处理单元1910,具体用于判断第一参数没有变化,所述处理单元1910指示所述收发单元1920不接收RRC重配完成消息;或者,所述处理单元1910,具体用于判断第一参数没有变化,所述处理单元1910不处理RRC重配完成消息。In one possible design, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that the first parameter has not changed, and the transceiver unit 1920 is specifically used to receive a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, which does not include the first parameter; or, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that the first parameter has not changed, and the processing unit 1910 instructs the transceiver unit 1920 not to receive the RRC reconfiguration completion message; or, the processing unit 1910 is specifically used to determine that the first parameter has not changed, and the processing unit 1910 does not process the RRC reconfiguration completion message.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参数为是否需要测量间隙指示参数或上行直流参数。In one possible design, the first parameter is whether a measurement gap indication parameter or an uplink DC parameter is required.
本申请实施例提出了一种通信装置2000,如图20所示,出示了本申请实施例的另一种通信装置的示意性框图。该通信装置2000包括处理器2010,所述处理器2010与至少一个存储器2020耦合,所述处理器2010用于读取所述至少一个存储器2020所存储的计算机程序,以执行本申请实施例中任意可能的实现方式中的方法。The embodiment of the present application proposes a communication device 2000, as shown in Figure 20, which shows a schematic block diagram of another communication device of the embodiment of the present application. The communication device 2000 includes a processor 2010, the processor 2010 is coupled to at least one memory 2020, and the processor 2010 is used to read the computer program stored in the at least one memory 2020 to execute the method in any possible implementation of the embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例又提出了一种通信装置2100,如图21所示,通信装置2100包括处理器2110和接口电路2120。处理器2110和接口电路2120之间相互耦合。可以理解的是,接口电路2120可以为收发器或输入输出接口。可选的,通信装置2100还可以包括存储器2130,用于存储处理器2110执行的指令或存储处理器2110运行指令所需要的输入数据或存储处理器2110运行指令后产生的数据。The embodiment of the present application further proposes a communication device 2100. As shown in FIG21, the communication device 2100 includes a processor 2110 and an interface circuit 2120. The processor 2110 and the interface circuit 2120 are coupled to each other. It is understood that the interface circuit 2120 can be a transceiver or an input-output interface. Optionally, the communication device 2100 may also include a memory 2130 for storing instructions executed by the processor 2110 or storing input data required by the processor 2110 to execute instructions or storing data generated after the processor 2110 executes instructions.
当通信装置2100用于实现图13或图15或图17或图18所示的方法时,处理器2110用于实现上述处理单元1910的功能,接口电路2120用于实现上述收发单元1920的功能。When the communication device 2100 is used to implement the method shown in Figure 13 or Figure 15 or Figure 17 or Figure 18, the processor 2110 is used to implement the function of the above-mentioned processing unit 1910, and the interface circuit 2120 is used to implement the function of the above-mentioned transceiver unit 1920.
当上述通信装置为应用于终端设备的芯片时,该终端设备芯片实现上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能。该终端设备芯片从终端设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收信息,该信息是网络设备发送给终端设备的;或者,该终端设备芯片向终端设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)发送信息,该信息是终端设备发送给网络设备的。When the above communication device is a chip applied to a terminal device, the terminal device chip implements the functions of the terminal device in the above method embodiment. The terminal device chip receives information from other modules in the terminal device (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and the information is sent by the network device to the terminal device; or the terminal device chip sends information to other modules in the terminal device (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and the information is sent by the terminal device to the network device.
当上述通信装置为应用于网络设备的芯片时,该网络设备芯片实现上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。该网络设备芯片从网络设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收信息,该信息是终端设备发送给网络设备的;或者,该网络设备芯片向网络设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)发送信息,该信息是网络设备发送给终端设备的。When the above communication device is a chip applied to a network device, the network device chip implements the function of the network device in the above method embodiment. The network device chip receives information from other modules in the network device (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and the information is sent by the terminal device to the network device; or the network device chip sends information to other modules in the network device (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and the information is sent by the network device to the terminal device.
本申请实施例的处理器可能是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor, DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。The processor of the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities. In the implementation process, each step of the above method embodiment can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or by instructions in the form of software. The above processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components. The methods, steps and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed. The general processor can be a microprocessor or the processor can also be any conventional processor, etc. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be directly embodied as a hardware decoding processor to be executed, or a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor to be executed. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as a random access memory, a flash memory, a read-only memory, a programmable read-only memory or an electrically erasable programmable memory, a register, etc. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
本申请实施例的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。The memory of the embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memories. Among them, the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), or a flash memory. The volatile memory may be a random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of example and not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as static RAM (SRAM), dynamic RAM (DRAM), synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), double data rate SDRAM (DDR SDRAM), enhanced SDRAM (ESDRAM), synchronous link DRAM (SLDRAM), and direct rambus RAM (DR RAM).
本申请实施例提供了一种通信系统2200,包括本申请实施例提供的通信的方法中的终端设备2210和网络设备2220。如图22所示,出示了本申请实施例的一种通信系统2200的示意性框图。The embodiment of the present application provides a communication system 2200, including a terminal device 2210 and a network device 2220 in the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG22 , a schematic block diagram of a communication system 2200 of the embodiment of the present application is shown.
本申请的实施例中的方法步骤可以通过硬件的方式来实现,也可以由处理器执行软件指令的方式来实现。软件指令可以由相应的软件模块组成,软件模块可以被存放于随机存取存储器、闪存、只读存储器、可编程只读存储器、可擦除可编程只读存储器、电可擦除可编程只读存储器、寄存器、硬盘、移动硬盘、CD-ROM或者本领域熟知的任何其它形式的存储介质中。一种示例性的存储介质耦合至处理器,从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息,且可向该存储介质写入信息。当然,存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC中。另外,该ASIC可以位于网络设备或终端设备中。当然,处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于网络设备或终端设备中。The method steps in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented by hardware, or by a processor executing software instructions. The software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, and the software modules can be stored in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, erasable programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable read-only memory, register, hard disk, mobile hard disk, CD-ROM or any other form of storage medium well known in the art. An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor so that the processor can read information from the storage medium and can write information to the storage medium. Of course, the storage medium can also be a component of the processor. The processor and the storage medium can be located in an ASIC. In addition, the ASIC can be located in a network device or a terminal device. Of course, the processor and the storage medium can also be present in a network device or a terminal device as discrete components.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机程序或指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序或指令时,全部或部分地执行本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、用户设备或者其它可编程装置。所述计算机程序或指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机程序或指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线或无线方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是集成一个或多个可用介质的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介 质,例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带;也可以是光介质,例如,数字视频光盘;还可以是半导体介质,例如,固态硬盘。该计算机可读存储介质可以是易失性或非易失性存储介质,或可包括易失性和非易失性两种类型的存储介质。In the above embodiments, it can be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions. When the computer program or instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the process or function described in the embodiment of the present application is executed in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a user device or other programmable device. The computer program or instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer program or instructions may be transmitted from one website site, computer, server or data center to another website site, computer, server or data center by wire or wireless means. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that a computer can access or a data storage device such as a server or data center that integrates one or more available media. The available medium may be a magnetic medium. The computer readable storage medium may be a volatile or non-volatile storage medium, or may include both volatile and non-volatile storage media.
可以理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It can be understood that in various embodiments of the present application, the size of the serial numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
可以理解,在本申请中,“当…时”、“若”以及“如果”均指在某种客观情况下装置会做出相应的处理,并非是限定时间,且也不要求装置实现时一定要有判断的动作,也不意味着存在其它限定。It can be understood that in the present application, "when", "if" and "if" all mean that the device will take corresponding actions under certain objective circumstances, and do not limit the time, nor do they require that the device must have a judgment action when it is implemented, nor do they mean that there are other limitations.
本领域技术人员可以理解:本申请中涉及的第一、第二等各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围。本申请中的编号(也可被称为索引)的具体取值、数量的具体取值、以及位置仅作为示意的目的,并不是唯一的表示形式,也并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围。本申请中涉及的第一个、第二个等各种数字编号也仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围。Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the first, second, and other various digital numbers involved in the present application are only for the convenience of description and are not intended to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. The specific values of the numbers (also referred to as indexes) in the present application, the specific values of the quantities, and the positions are only for illustrative purposes, are not the only form of representation, and are not intended to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. The first, second, and other various digital numbers involved in the present application are also only for the convenience of description and are not intended to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application.
另外,本申请中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系;本申请中术语“至少一个”,可以表示“一个”和“两个或两个以上”,例如,A、B和C中至少一个,可以表示:单独存在A,单独存在B,单独存在C、同时存在A和B,同时存在A和C,同时存在C和B,同时存在A和B和C,这七种情况。In addition, the term "and/or" in this application is only a description of the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there may be three relationships. For example, A and/or B can represent three situations: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or" relationship; the term "at least one" in this application can mean "one" and "two or more". For example, at least one of A, B and C can represent seven situations: A exists alone, B exists alone, C exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, A and C exist at the same time, C and B exist at the same time, and A, B and C exist at the same time.
本领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working processes of the systems, devices and units described above can refer to the corresponding processes in the aforementioned method embodiments and will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。 In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.

Claims (40)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    接收第一消息,所述第一消息携带第一信息,所述第一信息包括M个候选小区的配置信息,M为大于1的正整数;receiving a first message, where the first message carries first information, and the first information includes configuration information of M candidate cells, where M is a positive integer greater than 1;
    发送第二消息,所述第二消息携带M个第二信息,所述M个第二信息与所述M个候选小区的配置信息对应;Sending a second message, where the second message carries M pieces of second information, and the M pieces of second information correspond to the configuration information of the M candidate cells;
    接入第一小区,所述第一小区属于所述M个候选小区。Access a first cell, where the first cell belongs to the M candidate cells.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 1, characterized in that
    所述第一消息为无线资源控制RRC重配消息,所述第二消息为RRC重配完成消息。The first message is a radio resource control RRC reconfiguration message, and the second message is an RRC reconfiguration complete message.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that
    所述第二信息包括以下信息中的一项或多项:The second information includes one or more of the following information:
    上行直流参数;Uplink DC parameters;
    条件主辅小区PSCell添加或变更相关参数;Conditional primary and secondary cells PSCell add or change related parameters;
    测量报告可用指示;Measurement report available indication;
    测量间隙需求指示。Measuring gap requirement indication.
  4. 根据权利要求1至3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二消息包括M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息,所述M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息携带所述M个第二信息。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3 is characterized in that the second message includes an RRC reconfiguration completion message of M candidate cells, and the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells carries the M second information.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 4, characterized in that
    所述M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息不包括RRC处理标识。The RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells does not include an RRC processing identifier.
  6. 根据权利要求1至5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, further comprising:
    接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示接入所述第一小区。First indication information is received, where the first indication information indicates access to the first cell.
  7. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    发送第一消息,所述第一消息携带第一信息,所述第一信息包括M个候选小区的配置信息,M为大于1的正整数;Sending a first message, where the first message carries first information, and the first information includes configuration information of M candidate cells, where M is a positive integer greater than 1;
    接收第二消息,所述第二消息携带M个第二信息,所述M个第二信息与所述M个候选小区的配置信息对应。A second message is received, where the second message carries M second information, and the M second information corresponds to the configuration information of the M candidate cells.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 7, characterized in that
    所述第一消息为RRC重配消息,所述第二消息为RRC重配完成消息。The first message is an RRC reconfiguration message, and the second message is an RRC reconfiguration complete message.
  9. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 7 or 8, characterized in that
    所述第二信息包括以下信息中的一项或多项:The second information includes one or more of the following information:
    上行直流参数;Uplink DC parameters;
    条件主辅小区PSCell添加或变更相关参数; Conditional primary and secondary cells PSCell add or change related parameters;
    测量报告可用指示;Measurement report available indication;
    测量间隙需求指示。Measuring gap requirement indication.
  10. 根据权利要求7至9任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二消息包括M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息,所述M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息携带所述M个第二信息。The method according to any one of claims 7 to 9 is characterized in that the second message includes an RRC reconfiguration completion message of M candidate cells, and the RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells carries the M second information.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 10, characterized in that
    所述M个候选小区的RRC重配完成消息不包括RRC处理标识。The RRC reconfiguration completion message of the M candidate cells does not include an RRC processing identifier.
  12. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    接收第三消息,所述第三消息指示第三信息,所述第三信息中包括N个候选小区的配置信息和N个配置标识,所述N个配置标识用于标识所述N个候选小区的配置信息,N为正整数;receiving a third message, where the third message indicates third information, where the third information includes configuration information of N candidate cells and N configuration identifiers, where the N configuration identifiers are used to identify the configuration information of the N candidate cells, and N is a positive integer;
    接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示接入到第二小区,所述第二小区属于所述N个候选小区;receiving second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate access to a second cell, where the second cell belongs to the N candidate cells;
    发送第四消息,所述第四消息包括第一标识;其中,所述第一标识用于指示所述第二小区的配置信息。A fourth message is sent, where the fourth message includes a first identifier; wherein the first identifier is used to indicate configuration information of the second cell.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 12, characterized in that
    所述第三消息为RRC重配消息,所述第四消息为RRC重配完成消息。The third message is an RRC reconfiguration message, and the fourth message is an RRC reconfiguration complete message.
  14. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    发送第三消息,所述第三消息包括第三信息,所述第三信息中包括N个候选小区的配置信息,N为正整数;Sending a third message, where the third message includes third information, where the third information includes configuration information of N candidate cells, where N is a positive integer;
    发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示终端设备接入到第二小区,所述第二小区属于所述N个候选小区;Sending second indication information, where the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to access a second cell, where the second cell belongs to the N candidate cells;
    接收第四消息,所述第四消息包括第一标识;其中,所述第一标识用于指示所述第二小区的配置信息。A fourth message is received, where the fourth message includes a first identifier; wherein the first identifier is used to indicate configuration information of the second cell.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 14, characterized in that
    所述第三消息为RRC重配消息,所述第四消息为RRC重配完成消息。The third message is an RRC reconfiguration message, and the fourth message is an RRC reconfiguration complete message.
  16. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    接收第五消息,所述第五消息包括L个候选小区的配置信息,L为正整数;receiving a fifth message, where the fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer;
    如果收到第五消息后第一次接入第三小区,则发送第一RRC重配完成消息,所述第一RRC重配完成消息中包括所述第三小区对应的配置信息,所述第三小区属于所述L个候选小区。If the third cell is accessed for the first time after receiving the fifth message, a first RRC reconfiguration complete message is sent, wherein the first RRC reconfiguration complete message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括评估所述第三小区的执行条件被满足,接入所述第三小区。 The method according to claim 16 is characterized in that it also includes evaluating whether the execution condition of the third cell is met and accessing the third cell.
  18. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示接入所述第三小区。The method according to claim 16 is characterized in that it also includes receiving third indication information, wherein the third indication information indicates access to the third cell.
  19. 根据权利要求16至18任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 16 to 18, further comprising:
    如果收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中仅包括RRC处理标识;或者,If it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, a second RRC reconfiguration complete message is sent, and the second RRC reconfiguration complete message only includes the RRC processing identifier; or,
    如果收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,不发送RRC重配完成消息。If it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the RRC reconfiguration complete message is not sent.
  20. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括,A communication method, characterized by comprising:
    第一网络设备向终端设备发送第五消息,所述第五消息包括L个候选小区的配置信息,L为正整数;The first network device sends a fifth message to the terminal device, where the fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer;
    如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后第一次接入第三小区,则所述终端设备向所述第一网络设备发送第一RRC重配完成消息,所述第一RRC重配完成消息中包括所述第三小区对应的配置信息,所述第三小区属于所述L个候选小区。If the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message to the first network device, and the first RRC reconfiguration completion message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的系统,其特征在于,还包括,The system according to claim 20, further comprising:
    所述第一网络设备向所述终端设备发送第三指示信息,The first network device sends third indication information to the terminal device,
    所述第三指示信息指示所述终端设备接入所述第三小区。The third indication information instructs the terminal device to access the third cell.
  22. 根据权利要求20或21所述的系统,其特征在于,还包括:The system according to claim 20 or 21, characterized in that it also includes:
    所述终端设备评估所述第三小区的执行条件被满足,接入所述第三小区。The terminal device evaluates that the execution condition of the third cell is met and accesses the third cell.
  23. 根据权利要求20至22任一项所述的系统,其特征在于,还包括:The system according to any one of claims 20 to 22, further comprising:
    如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,所述终端设备向所述第一网络设备发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中仅包括RRC处理标识;或者,If it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the first network device, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes the RRC processing identifier; or,
    如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,所述终端设备不发送RRC重配完成消息。If it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  24. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    第一网络设备向终端设备发送第五消息,所述第五消息包括L个候选小区的配置信息,L为正整数;The first network device sends a fifth message to the terminal device, where the fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer;
    如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后第一次接入第三小区,则所述终端设备向第二网络设备发送第一RRC重配完成消息,所述第一RRC重配完成消息中包括所述第三小区对应的配置信息,所述第三小区属于所述L个候选小区;If the terminal device accesses the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a first RRC reconfiguration completion message to the second network device, where the first RRC reconfiguration completion message includes configuration information corresponding to the third cell, and the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells;
    所述第二网络设备是第三小区所属的网络设备。The second network device is a network device to which the third cell belongs.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的系统,其特征在于,还包括:The system according to claim 24, further comprising:
    所述第一网络设备向所述终端设备发送第三指示信息,The first network device sends third indication information to the terminal device,
    所述第三指示信息指示所述终端设备接入所述第三小区。 The third indication information instructs the terminal device to access the third cell.
  26. 根据权利要求24或25所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to claim 24 or 25, characterized in that it also includes:
    所述终端设备评估所述第三小区的执行条件被满足,接入所述第三小区。The terminal device evaluates that the execution condition of the third cell is met and accesses the third cell.
  27. 根据权利要求24至26任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 24 to 26, further comprising:
    如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,所述终端设备向所述第二网络设备发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中仅包括RRC处理标识;或者,If it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device sends a second RRC reconfiguration completion message to the second network device, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message only includes the RRC processing identifier; or,
    如果所述终端设备收到第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,所述终端设备不发送RRC重配完成消息。If it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, the terminal device does not send an RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  28. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    接收第五消息,所述第五消息包括L个候选小区的配置信息,L为正整数;receiving a fifth message, where the fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer;
    如果收到所述第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,发送第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数,所述第三小区属于所述L个候选小区,所述第一参数为是否需要测量间隙指示参数或上行直流参数中的至少一个。If it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, a second RRC reconfiguration completion message is sent, and the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter, the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells, and the first parameter is whether a measurement gap indication parameter or at least one of an uplink DC parameter is required.
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的方法,其特征在于,所述如果收到所述第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,发送第二RRC重配完成消息,包括:The method according to claim 28, characterized in that, if the third cell is not accessed for the first time after the fifth message is received, sending a second RRC reconfiguration complete message comprises:
    如果收到所述第五消息后非第一次接入所述第三小区,且所述第一参数没有变化,发送所述第二RRC重配完成消息。If it is not the first time to access the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the first parameter has not changed, the second RRC reconfiguration completion message is sent.
  30. 根据权利要求28或29任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 28 or 29, characterized in that
    接收第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示在所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不携带所述第一参数。Fourth indication information is received, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the first parameter is not carried in the second RRC reconfiguration complete message.
  31. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括,A communication method, characterized by comprising:
    向终端设备发送第五消息,所述第五消息包括L个候选小区的配置信息,L为正整数;Sending a fifth message to the terminal device, where the fifth message includes configuration information of L candidate cells, where L is a positive integer;
    如果所述终端设备收到所述第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,则接收第二RRC重配完成消息,所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不包括第一参数,所述第三小区属于所述L个候选小区,所述第一参数为是否需要测量间隙指示参数或上行直流参数中的至少一个。If it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, it receives a second RRC reconfiguration completion message, the second RRC reconfiguration completion message does not include the first parameter, the third cell belongs to the L candidate cells, and the first parameter is whether a measurement gap indication parameter or at least one of an uplink DC parameter is required.
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的方法,其特征在于,所述如果所述终端设备收到所述第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,则接收第二RRC重配完成消息,还包括:The method according to claim 31, characterized in that if the terminal device does not access the third cell for the first time after receiving the fifth message, receiving the second RRC reconfiguration completion message further comprises:
    如果所述终端设备收到所述第五消息后非第一次接入第三小区,且所述第一参数没有变化,则接收第二RRC重配完成消息。If it is not the first time that the terminal device accesses the third cell after receiving the fifth message, and the first parameter has not changed, a second RRC reconfiguration completion message is received.
  33. 根据权利要求31或32任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 31 or 32, characterized in that
    发送第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述终端设备在所述第二RRC重配完成消息中不携带所述第一参数。Send fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to instruct the terminal device not to carry the first parameter in the second RRC reconfiguration completion message.
  34. 一种终端设备,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器与至少一个存储器耦合,所述处理器用于读取所述至少一个存储器所存储的计算机程序,以执行如权利要求1至6、或 12至13、或16至19、或28至30中任意一项所述的方法,或执行如权利要求7至11中任意一项所述的方法。A terminal device, characterized in that it comprises a processor, the processor is coupled to at least one memory, and the processor is used to read a computer program stored in the at least one memory to execute claims 1 to 6, or The method according to any one of claims 12 to 13, or 16 to 19, or 28 to 30, or the method according to any one of claims 7 to 11.
  35. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器与至少一个存储器耦合,所述处理器用于读取所述至少一个存储器所存储的计算机程序,以执行如权利要求7至11、或14至15、或31至33中任意一项所述的方法。A network device, characterized in that it includes a processor, which is coupled to at least one memory, and the processor is used to read a computer program stored in the at least one memory to execute the method described in any one of claims 7 to 11, or 14 to 15, or 31 to 33.
  36. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括至少一个处理器以及接口电路,所述接口电路用于为所述至少一个处理器提供指令和/或数据的输入或输出,所述至少一个处理器执行上述指令时,使得所述装置实现如权利要求1-33任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that it includes at least one processor and an interface circuit, wherein the interface circuit is used to provide input or output of instructions and/or data for the at least one processor, and when the at least one processor executes the above instructions, the device implements the method described in any one of claims 1-33.
  37. 一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至6、或12至13、或16至19、或28至30中任意一项所述的方法,或者使得所述计算机执行如权利要求7至11、或14至15、或20至23、或24至27、或31至33中任意一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium comprising instructions, which, when executed on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method of any one of claims 1 to 6, or 12 to 13, or 16 to 19, or 28 to 30, or causes the computer to execute the method of any one of claims 7 to 11, or 14 to 15, or 20 to 23, or 24 to 27, or 31 to 33.
  38. 一种计算机程序产品,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行如权利要求1至6、或12至13、或16至19、或28至30中任意一项所述的方法,或者使得所述计算机执行如权利要求7至11、或14至15、或20至23、或24至27、或31至33中任意一项所述的方法。A computer program product comprising instructions which, when executed on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 6, or 12 to 13, or 16 to 19, or 28 to 30, or causes the computer to perform the method as claimed in any one of claims 7 to 11, or 14 to 15, or 20 to 23, or 24 to 27, or 31 to 33.
  39. 一种芯片,其特征在于,包括处理器和通信接口,所述处理器用于读取指令或计算机程序以执行如权利要求1至6、或12至13、或16至19、或28至30中任意一项所述的方法,或者使得所述计算机执行如权利要求7至11、或14至15、或31至33中任意一项所述的方法。A chip, characterized in that it includes a processor and a communication interface, wherein the processor is used to read instructions or computer programs to execute the method as described in any one of claims 1 to 6, or 12 to 13, or 16 to 19, or 28 to 30, or to enable the computer to execute the method as described in any one of claims 7 to 11, or 14 to 15, or 31 to 33.
  40. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,包括如权利要求34所述的终端设备,以及包括如权利要求35所述的网络设备。 A communication system, characterized in that it includes the terminal device as described in claim 34 and the network device as described in claim 35.
PCT/CN2023/126150 2022-11-04 2023-10-24 Communication method, device and system WO2024093721A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202211379795.2 2022-11-04
CN202211379795 2022-11-04
CN202310403655.2 2023-04-07
CN202310403655.2A CN117998495A (en) 2022-11-04 2023-04-07 Communication method, device and system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024093721A1 true WO2024093721A1 (en) 2024-05-10

Family

ID=90898149

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/126150 WO2024093721A1 (en) 2022-11-04 2023-10-24 Communication method, device and system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117998495A (en)
WO (1) WO2024093721A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021080481A1 (en) * 2019-10-24 2021-04-29 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) User equipment, first network node, second network node and methods for handling a conditional handover in a wireless communications network
CN113271633A (en) * 2020-02-14 2021-08-17 华为技术有限公司 Switching method and communication device
CN113473547A (en) * 2020-03-30 2021-10-01 华为技术有限公司 Conditional primary and secondary cell adding/changing method and device
CN114557035A (en) * 2019-08-15 2022-05-27 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Conditional handover in handover command

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114557035A (en) * 2019-08-15 2022-05-27 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Conditional handover in handover command
WO2021080481A1 (en) * 2019-10-24 2021-04-29 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) User equipment, first network node, second network node and methods for handling a conditional handover in a wireless communications network
CN113271633A (en) * 2020-02-14 2021-08-17 华为技术有限公司 Switching method and communication device
CN113473547A (en) * 2020-03-30 2021-10-01 华为技术有限公司 Conditional primary and secondary cell adding/changing method and device

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
HUAWEI, HISILICON: "UE behaviour upon CPAC execution", 3GPP DRAFT; R2-2201094, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG2, no. E-meeting; 20220117 - 20220125, 11 January 2022 (2022-01-11), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP052094200 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117998495A (en) 2024-05-07

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11076334B2 (en) Data forwarding method, device, and communications system
US20230117911A1 (en) Condition-based secondary node or primary secondary cell change method and device
US20230009565A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus applied to multi-link device in wireless local area network
US11838815B2 (en) Cell handover method, terminal device, and network device
WO2024045693A1 (en) Access method and apparatus based on heterogeneous network roaming
WO2021018283A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2020077577A1 (en) Data packet transmission method and device
WO2021164720A1 (en) Re-establishment method and communication apparatus
WO2021026747A1 (en) Radio communication method and a terminal device
US20230012998A1 (en) Communication method, access network device, terminal device, and core network device
WO2019072170A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2022151306A1 (en) Data transmission method and apparatus
US20230362596A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022011500A1 (en) Configuration method and apparatus
WO2019076347A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2023010367A1 (en) Terminal device transfer method, apparatus, and system
WO2021226967A1 (en) Handover method and device
US20230262567A1 (en) Communication Method and Communication Apparatus
WO2024093721A1 (en) Communication method, device and system
WO2021102841A1 (en) Data transmission method and apparatus based on network slicing, and system
JP2022551375A (en) Network device and method
WO2023050181A1 (en) Wireless communication method and wireless communication apparatus
WO2024000583A1 (en) Resource processing method, terminal device, and network device
WO2023060585A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
WO2024061165A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23884653

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1